2003 Odyssey Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction..................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety ..........................................................................................................................ii
Your Vehicle at a Glance...............................................................................................................................2
Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................69
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features......................................................................................................
.143
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving ..............................................................................................................................
...............243
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving...........................................................................................................................................................257
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance..............................................................................................................................
...................283
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Appearance Care..............................................................................................................................
...........343
Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your car ever needs body repairs.
Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................351
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information...............................................................................................................................383
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada).....................................................................
.397
A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only
)...............................................................................................................401
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index .................................................................................................................................................................I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
This Owner’s Manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle, and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
This Owner’s Manual covers all models of
the Odyssey. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Si prefiere este Manual del
Propietario en español,
comuníquese con el concesionario
Honda.
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votreconcessionnairede
commander le numéro de pièce
38S0X640
Owner’s Identification
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
Main Menu
！
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Honda
dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to
your Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your Honda, other
property, or the environment.
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Congratulations Your selection of a 2003 Honda Odyssey was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Introduction
WARNING:
i
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
on the vehicle.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
These signal words mean:
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
AFewWordsAboutSafety
Safety Labels
Safety Messages
Safety Section
Instructions
Safety Headings
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
ii
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
2
INDICATOR LIGHTS
GAUGES
SHIFT LEVER
HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
REAR A/C CONTROL
GLOVE BOX
AUDIO SYSTEM/
REAR ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM
CENTER TABLE
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL
FUEL FILL
DOOR RELEASE
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
POWER
DOOR LOCK
SWITCHES
(P.71)
(P.78)
(P.261)
(P.144)
(P.152)
(P.166)
(P.100)
(P.169, 181, 201, 217)
(P.130)
(P.138)
(P.129)
(P.245)
(P.246)
(P.123)
(P.124)
(P.92)
SEAT HEATER
SWICH
Main Menu
＊
＊
To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
3
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM
POWER SLIDING
DOOR SWITCHES
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
HAZARD WARNING
LIGHTS
DIGITAL CLOCK
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
LIGHT CONTROL
SWITCH
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
CRUISE
CONTROL
HORN
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
CRUISE
CONTROL
MIRROR
CONTROLS
PASSENGER
AIRBAG CUTOFF
INDICATOR
(P.62)
(P.269)
(P.103)
(P.82/84)
(P.128)
(P.199)
(P.88)
(P.84/86)
(P.139)
(P.87)
(P.130)
(P.87)
(P.235)
(P.235)
Main Menu
4
Main Menu
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts
properly. It explains your Supple-
mental Restraint System. And it tells
you how to properly restrain infants
and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.........................................Airbags . 10
.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11
..........................Head Restraints . 11
..................................Door Locks . 11
........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12
............................Protecting Adults . 13
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 15
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 16
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
.....................................Belts . 17
....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 20
7. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 21
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 22
...Additional Safety Precautions . 22
........................Protecting Children . 24
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 24
Children Should Sit in the Back
...........................................Seat . 25
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 26
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 28
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 28
...Additional Safety Precautions . 29
General Guidelines for Using
...............................Child Seats . 30
.......................Protecting Infants . 34
.........Protecting Small Children . 38
.......Protecting Larger Children . 42
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 46
.............................Using LATCH . 48
Additional Information About Your
.................................Seat Belts . 50
..Seat Belt System Components . 50
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 50
Automatic Seat Belt
.............................Tensionners . 52
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 53
Additional Information About Your
.....................................Airbags . 54
........................SRS Components . 54
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 55
How Your Side Airbags
.........................................Work . 59
How the SRS Indicator Light
.......................................Works . 59
How the Side Airbag Cutoff
...........Indicator Light Works . 60
How the Passenger Airbag
..........Cutoff Indicator Works . 62
.............................Airbag Service . 64
...Additional Safety Precautions . 65
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 66
...................................Safety Labels . 67
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
Main Menu
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed the greater the
risk, but serious accidents can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual. (See page
.)
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance. (See page .)
Children are safest when they are
properly restrained in a back seat,
notthefrontseat.Achildwhoistoo
smallforaseatbeltmustbeproperly
restrained in a child safety seat. (See
page .)
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags
supplement seat belts, but airbags
are designed to inflate only in a
moderate to severe frontal collision.
So even though your vehicle is
equipped with airbags, make sure
you and your passengers always
wear your seat belts, and wear them
properly. (See page .)17
24
10
288
Driver and Passenger Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Restrain All Children
Don’t Drink and Drive
6
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
Some safety features do not require
anyactiononyourpart.These
include a strong steel framework
that forms a safety cage around the
passenger compartment; front and
rear crush zones that are designed to
crumple and absorb energy during a
crash; a collapsible steering column;
and seat belt tensioners that
automatically tighten the front seat
belts in the event of a crash.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
7
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(8)
(7)
(9)
(10)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats & Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(10) Door Locks
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These safety features are designed
to reduce the severity of injuries in a
crash. However, you and your
passengers can’t take full advantage
of these safety features unless you
remain sitting in a proper position
and
In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
Foryoursafety,andthesafetyof
your passengers, your vehicle is
equipped with seat belts in all seating
positions.
Your seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your seat
belts.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Seat Belts
always wear your seat belts
properly.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
8
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag, and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
When properly worn, seat belts:
What you should do:
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
if you have airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force and
speed. So while airbags help save
lives, they can cause minor injuries,
or more serious or even fatal
injuries if occupants are not
properly restrained or sitting
properly.
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact.
Your vehicle has a Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) with dual-
stage, dual-threshold front airbags to
help protect the heads and chests of
the driver and a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe frontal
collision.
What you should do:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, rollovers, or minor
frontal or side collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
Airbags
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
10
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Head restraints can help protect you
from whiplash and other injuries. For
maximum protection, the back of
your head should rest against the
center of the head restraint.
Reclining a seat-back too far reduces
the seat belt’s effectiveness and
increases the chance that the seat’s
occupant will slide under the seat
belt in a crash and be seriously
injured.
Move the front
seats as far back as possible, and
keep adjustable seat-backs in an
upright position whenever the
vehicle is moving.
Your vehicle’s seats are designed to
keep you in a comfortable, upright
position so you can take full
advantage of the protection offered
by seat belts and the energy
absorbing materials in the seats.
How you adjust your seats and seat-
backs can also affect your safety. For
example, sitting too close to the
steering wheel or dashboard
increases the risk of you or your
passenger being injured by striking
theinsideofthevehicle,orbyan
inflating airbag.
Keeping your doors locked reduces
thechanceofbeingthrownoutof
the vehicle during a crash. It also
helps prevent occupants from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out, and outsiders from
unexpectedly opening your doors.
Seats & Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Door Locks
What you should do:
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To make sure you and your
passengers get the maximum
protection from your vehicle’s safety
features, check the following each
time before you drive away:
Any infant or small child is
properly restrained in a child seat
in a back seat (see page ).
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in severe
crashes, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Frontseatoccupantsaresitting
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel and
dashboard (see page ).
Seat-backs are upright (see page
).
Head restraints are properly
adjusted (see page ).
Alldoorsandthetailgateare
closed and locked (see page ).
All cargo is properly stored or
secured (see page ).
All adults, and children who have
outgrown child safety seats, are
wearing their seat belts and
wearingthemproperly(seepage
).
24
13
15
16
13
253
17
Pre-Drive Safety Checklist
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Driver and Passenger Safety
12
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver and other adult
occupants.
These instructions also apply to
children who have outgrown child
seats and are large enough to wear
lap/shoulder belts. (See page for
important additional guidelines on
how to properly protect larger
children.)
Your vehicle has a door and tailgate
monitor light on the instrument
panel to indicate when a specific
door or the tailgate is not tightly
closed.
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and
tailgate are closed and locked.
For security, locked doors can
prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door when
you come to a stop.
See page for how to lock the
doors.
For safety, locking the doors reduces
the chance that a passenger,
especially a child, will open a door
while the vehicle is moving and
accidentally fall out. It also reduces
the chance of someone being thrown
out of the vehicle during a crash.
Any driver who sits too close to the
steering wheel is at risk of being
seriously injured or killed by striking
the steering wheel or from being
struck by an inflating front airbag
during a crash.
42
92
CONTINUED
Introduction Adjust the Front SeatsClose and Lock the Doors1. 2.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
Most shorter drivers can get far
enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the pedals.
However, if you are concerned about
sitting too close, we recommend that
you investigate whether some type
of adaptive equipment may help.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
adjust the seat so the center of the
chest is at least 10 inches (25 cm)
away from the center of the steering
wheel.Alsomakesureyourfront
seat passenger moves the seat as far
to the rear as possible.
To reduce the chance of injury, wear
your seat belt properly, sit upright
with your back against the seat, and
movetheseatawayfromthe
steering wheel to the farthest
distance that allows you to maintain
full control of the vehicle.
110
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
14
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for how to adjust seat-
backs.
A front passenger should also adjust
the seat-back to an upright position,
but as far from the dashboard as
possible. A passenger who sits too
close to the dashboard could be
injured if the front airbag inflates.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel. If you
sit too close to the steering wheel,
you could be injured if the front
airbag inflates.
111
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position and sit well
back in the seat.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before driving, make sure everyone
with an adjustable head restraint has
properly positioned the head
restraint. The restraint should be
positioned so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. A taller
person should adjust the restraint as
high as possible.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints.
115
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
16
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Also check
that the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If necessary, pull up on the shoulder
belt again to remove any slack from
the shoulder belt, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
Using a Lap/Shoulder Belt
(Except the center position of the
third row)
17
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
The front seats and middle row seats
have adjustable seat belt anchors. To
adjust the height of a seat belt
anchor, press the release button and
slide the anchor up or down as
needed (it has four positions).
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
Unlatch the metal plate of the
shoulder belt from the anchor
on the ceiling and extend the
belt by pulling the metal plate.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Adults
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
Using the Lap/Shoulder Belt in the
Center Position of the Third Row
18
RELEASE
BUTTON
METAL PLATE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Attach the metal hook on the edge of
the shoulder belt to the metal loop
on the latch plate of the lap belt
markedCENTER.Makesurethe
shoulder belt is securely attached
and it is not twisted. A twisted belt
can cause serious injuries in a crash.
Insert the latch plate of the lap belt
into the buckle marked CENTER. If
the belt is too short, hold the latch
plate at a right angle and pull on the
plate to extend the belt. Then insert
the latch plate into the buckle, and
tug on the lap and shoulder belts to
make sure the belt is securely
latched.
Position the lap belt as low as
possible across your hips, then
pull on the loose end of the lap
belt for a snug but comfortable
fit. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash
andreducesthechanceof
internal injuries.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
METAL
HOOK
LATCH PLATE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If necessary, pull up on the shoulder
belt again to remove any slack from
the shoulder belt, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Anyone using a seat belt that is
not working properly can be
seriously injured or killed. Have your
Honda dealer check the belt as soon
as possible.
See page for additional
information about your seat belt
system and how to take care of your
belts. Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,
so that the wheel points toward your
chest, not toward your face.
Pointing the steering wheel toward
your chest provides optimal
protection from the airbag.
See page for how to adjust the
steering wheel.
50
88
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
If a Seat Belt Doesn’t Work Properly
No one should
sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt.
Adjust the Steering Wheel6.
20
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured by
striking interior parts of the vehicle,
or by being struck by an inflating
front airbag. Being struck by an
inflating side airbag can result in
possibly serious injuries.
Remember, to get the best
protection from your vehicle’s
airbags and other safety features,
you must sit properly and wear your
seat belt properly.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
7.
21
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pregnant women should also sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard. This will reduce the risk
of injuries to both the mother and
her unborn child that can be caused
by a crash or an inflating airbag.
Each time you have a check-up, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Because protecting the mother is the
best way to protect her unborn child,
a pregnant woman should always
wear a seat belt whenever she drives
or rides in a vehicle.
Remember to keep the lap portion of
the belt as low as possible across
your hips.
All passengers
must sit in locked, upright seats
andbeproperlyrestrainedbyseat
belts.
A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
22
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your
hands or arms are close to the
airbag covers in the center of the
steering wheel and on top of the
dashboard, they could be injured if
the airbags inflate.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
severely compromise the
protective capability of the seat
belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
If a side airbag
inflates,acupholderorotherhard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
vehicle and hurt someone.
Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard, could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the car and hurt
someone.
This could make the driver’s
seat position sensor or the front
passenger’s seat weight sensors
ineffective.
This could
cause problems with the driver’s
seat position sensor or the front
passenger’s seat weight sensors.
Protecting Adults
Driver and Passenger Safety
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a front door.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Do not modify the front seats.
Do not place any items under
the front seats.
23
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many parents and other
adults may not know how to
protect young passengers. (See page
.)
So if you have children, or if you ever
need to drive with a grandchild or
other children in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be restrained
whenever they ride in a vehicle.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of death of children ages 12 and
under.
(See page .)
30
42
properly
All Children Must Be Restrained
Anychildwhoistoosmalltoweara
seat belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat.
A larger child should always be
restrained with a seat belt, and use a
booster, if needed.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
24
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in the
back seat, not the front seat. The
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
In a back seat, children are less
likely to be injured by striking hard
interior parts during a collision or
hard braking. Also, children cannot
be injured by an inflating airbag
when they ride in the back.During a
crash, the belt could press deep
into the child and cause very
serious injuries.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward into the
dashboard and crush the child.
Ifyouarewearingaseatbelt,the
child can be torn from your arms
during a crash. For example, if
your vehicle crashes into a parked
vehicleat30mph(48km/h),a
20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a
600-lb (275 kg) force, and you will
not be able to hold on.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Children Should Sit in the Back
Seat
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and an infant or child.
Additional Precautions to Parents
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
25
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
With an advanced airbag system, the
front passenger’s airbag is turned off
if sensors detect a total weight of
less than about 65 lbs (30 kg) in the
seat, and the ‘‘Passenger Airbag
Cutoff’’ indicator is turned on. (See
page for additional information on
how the passenger’s airbag works.)
Even if the passenger’s front airbag
is turned off, we strongly
recommend that infants, small
children, and larger children ride
properly restrained in a back seat
wheretheywillbesafer.
To help prevent airbag-caused
deaths and injuries to children, this
vehicle has an advanced airbag
system.
57
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
26
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboardand
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
To remind you of the front airbag
hazards, your vehicle has warning
labels on the driver’s and front
passenger’s visors. Please read and
follow the instructions on these
labels.
U.S. Models Canadian Models
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Your vehicle has two rows of back
seats where children can be properly
restrained.
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear a seat belt
properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
If you ever have to carry a group of
children (when carpooling for
example), and a child must ride in
front:
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards from
the passenger’s front airbag, and
paying close attention to a child
distracts the driver from the
important tasks of driving, placing
both of you at risk.
If a child requires physical attention
or frequent visual contact, we
strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in a back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
42
13
21
17
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
28
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Using this feature will
prevent children from opening the
doors and accidentally falling out
(see page ).
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous. For
example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. And
children left alone with the key in
the ignition can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.Using this feature
will prevent children from
operating the doors accidentally
(see page ).
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside the
vehicle. Teach your children not to
play in or around vehicles.
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition,
and open the tailgate, which can
lead to accidental injury or death.
98
104
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Safety Precautions
Use childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
doors.
Do not leave children alone in your
vehicle.
Use the power sliding door main
switch to prevent children from
opening and closing the rear
sliding doors.
Lock all doors and the tailgate
when your vehicle is not in use.
Keep vehicle keys and remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
29
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The following pages give general
guidelines for selecting and installing
child seats for infants and small
children.
To provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Childrenuptoaboutone
year old should be restrained in a
rear-facing, reclining child seat. Only
a rear-facing seat provides the
proper support to protect an infant’s
head, neck, and back. See page
for additional information on
protecting infants.
A child who is too
large for a rear-facing child seat, and
who can sit up without support,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing child seat. See page for
additional information on protecting
small children.
The child seat should
meet Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)
or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 (CMVSS 213). Look
for the manufacturer’s statement
of compliance on the boxes.
38
34
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
General Guidelines for Using
Child Seats
Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Infants: Small Children:
The child seat should meet safety
standards.
1.
2.
30
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Due to variations in the design of
child seats, vehicle seats, and seat
belts, all child seats will not fit all
vehicle seating positions.
However, Honda is confident that
one or more child seat models can fit
andbeproperlyinstalledinall
recommended seating positions in
your vehicle.
Before purchasing a child seat, we
recommend that parents test the
child seat in the specific vehicle
seating position (or positions) where
they intend to use the seat. If a
previously purchased child seat does
not fit, you may need to buy a
different one that will fit.
Your vehicle has lower anchors
installed for use with LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) - compatible child seats.
For more information, see page .48
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
3.
31
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This page briefly summarizes
Honda’s recommendations on where
to place rear-facing and forward-
facing child seats in your vehicle.
Recommended positions.
Properlysecurearear-facingchild
seat (see page ).
Recommended
positions. Properly secure a front-
facing child seat (see page ).
To help prevent airbag-caused
deaths and injuries to children,
this vehicle has an advanced
airbag system.
With this system, the front
passenger’s airbag is turned off
if sensors detect a total weight
of less than about 65 lbs (30 kg)
in the seat.
Even if the front passenger’s
airbag is turned off, we strongly
recommend that infants and
small children ride properly
restrained in a back seat where
they will be safer.
Not recommended. If
a small child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position and secure a front-
facing child seat with the seat belt
(see page ).
Never in the front seat, due
to the front airbag hazard. Not
recommended.
39
35
39
Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s Seat
Back Seats
Infants:
Small children:
Small children:
Infants:
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Airbags Pose Serious
Risks to Children
32
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After selecting a proper child seat,
and a good position to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
canbethrownoutoftheseatina
crash and be seriously injured.
However, a child seat does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehicles
or seating positions, it may be
difficult to install a child seat so that
it does not move at all. Some side-to-
side or back-and-forth movement can
be expected and should not reduce
the child seat’s effectiveness.
When you are not using a child seat,
either remove it and store it in a safe
place, or make sure it is properly
secured. An unsecured child seat can
be thrown around the vehicle during
a crash or sudden stop and injure
someone.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured
in the desired seating position.
To provide security during normal
driving maneuvers as well as during
a collision, we recommend that
parents secure a child seat as firmly
as possible.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
All child seats are
designed to be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt. Some child seats
can be secured to the vehicle’s
LATCH anchorage system instead.
A child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash. See pages
, and for instructions on
howtoproperlysecurechildseats
in this vehicle.
39 4835
Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.
Storing a Child Seat
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
1.
2.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
An infant must be restrained in a
rear-facing child seat until the child
reaches the seat maker’s weight or
height limit and is at least one year
old.
We strongly recommend placing a
rear-facing child seat in a back seat,
not the front. Even with advanced
airbags, which can automatically
turn the passenger’s front airbag off
(see page ), a back seat is the
safest place for an infant.
If an infant must be closely watched,
have another adult sit in a back seat
next to the baby.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
62
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Child Seat Placement
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
34
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
With the child seat in the desired
back seating position, route the
belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker’s
instructions, then insert the latch
plate into the buckle.
The lap/shoulder belts in the outer
back seats have a locking
mechanism that must be activated to
secure a child seat.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to secure a rear-
facing child seat with this type of
seat belt.
See page for how to secure a rear-
facing child seat in the center
position on the third seat with the lap
part of the lap/shoulder belt.
For tips on installing a rear-facing
child seat with either type of seat
belt, see page .
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front-seat passenger from
moving the seat as far back as
recommended (see page ). Or it
may prevent them from locking the
seat-back in the desired upright
position (see page ).
In either case, we recommend that
you place the child seat in another
back seating position, or leave the
affected seat unoccupied. If the
problem cannot be solved, you may
wish to get a smaller rear-facing
child seat.
If you have a child seat designed to
be attached to the vehicle’s LATCH
anchorage system, follow the
instructions on page .
1.
13
15
37
48
37
CONTINUED
Installing a Rear-Facing Child Seat
with a Lap/Shoulder Belt
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat, while
pulling up on the belt.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
4.
3.
2. 5.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
36
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Forproperprotection,aninfantmust
ride in a reclined, or semi-reclined
position. To determine the proper
reclining angle, check with the baby’s
doctor or follow the seat maker’s
recommendations.
To achieve the desired reclining
angle, it may help to put a rolled up
towel under the toe of the child seat,
as shown.
Then pull hard on the loose end of
thebelttoremovetheanyslack(it
may help to put weight on the child
seat while pulling on the belt).
Finally, follow instruction number 5
on page to verify that the child
seat is secured.
To install a rear-facing child seat in
the center position of the third seat,
use the lap part of the lap/shoulder
belt. Follow instruction number 1 on
page for routing and latching the
seat belt.
35
36
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
Tips
Installing a Rear-Facing Child Seat in
the Center Position of the Third Seat
37
Main Menu
Table of Contents
We also recommend that a small
child stay in the child seat as long as
possible, until the child reaches the
weight or height limit for the seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
A child at least one year old who can
sit up without support, and who fits
within the child seat maker’s weight
and height limits, should be
restrained in a forward-facing,
upright child seat.
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat,notthefront.Evenwith
advanced airbags, which can
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page ), a
back seat is the safest place for a
small child.
If an child must be closely watched,
have another adult sit in a back seat
next to the child.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle, and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
62
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Child Seat Placement
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
38
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The lap/shoulder belts in the outer
back and front passenger seating
positions have a locking mechanism
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to secure a
forward-facing child seat with this
type of seat belt.
See page for how to secure a
forward-facing child seat in the
center position on the third seat with
the lap part of the lap/shoulder belt.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle, and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
If you have a child seat designed to
be attached to the vehicle’s LATCH
anchorage system, follow the
instructions on page .
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
1.41
48
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
Improperly placing a forward-
facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury
or death if the front airbags
inflate.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible and properly restrain
the child.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure. It
mayhelptoputweightonthe
child seat, or push on the back of
the seat, while pulling up on the
belt.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
4.2.
3.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
40
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To deactivate the locking
mechanism in order to remove a
child restraint system, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To install a forward-facing child seat
in the center position of the third
seat, use the lap part of the lap/
shoulder belt. Follow instruction
number 1 on page for routing and
latching the seat belt.
5.
39
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat in the Center
Position of the Third Seat
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Then pull hard on the loose end of
thebelttoremovetheanyslack(it
may help to put weight on the child
seat while pulling on the belt).
Finally, follow instruction number 5
on page to verify that the child
seat is secured.
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in the back seat on a
booster and wear a lap/shoulder belt.
We recommend that the child use a
booster seat until the child is tall
enough to use the seat belt without a
booster.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in the front seat.
41
Protecting Larger Children
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
42
Allowing a larger child to sit
improperly in the front seat can
result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must sit in front,
make sure the child moves the
seat as far back as possible,
uses a booster seat if needed,
and wears the seat belt properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
sit in a rear seat, all the way back
against the seat, and put on the seat
belt. Follow the instructions on page
. Then check how the belt fits.
If the shoulder part of the belt rests
over the child’s collarbone and
against the center of the chest, and
the lap belt rests over the child’s
hipbones and touches the tops of the
thighs as shown, the child is
probably big enough to wear the seat
belt.
However, if the shoulder belt
touchesorcrossesthechild’sneck,
or if the lap belt crosses the child’s
stomach, the child needs to use a
booster seat.
This could result in serious neck and
internal injuries during a crash.
If they do, they could
be very seriously injured in a crash.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt, severely
compromise the protective capability
of the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
This could cause
very serious injuries during a crash.
It also increases the chance that the
child will slide under the belt in a
crash and be injured.
17
CONTINUED
Checking Seat Belt Fit Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck or over the stomach.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not put any accessories on a seat
belt.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back or
under the arm.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
We strongly recommend that a child
whousedaboosterrideinaback
seat,notthefront.Evenifthe
passenger’s front airbag is off, a
back seat is the safest place for the
child.
Whichever style you select, follow
the booster seat maker’s instructions.
If a child who uses a booster must
ride in front, move the vehicle seat
as far to the rear as possible, and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of the ears are
even with the top of the seat-back. A
child of this height should be tall
enough to use the lap/shoulder belt
without a booster.
Even then, the child may still need to
use a booster seat. Note that some
states now require children to use
boosters until they reach a certain
ageand/orweight.Besuretocheck
current laws in the state or states
where you intend to drive.
If the passenger’s front airbag is on,
and it inflates in a moderate to
severe frontal collision, the airbag
can cause serious injuries to a child
who is unrestrained, improperly
restrained, sitting too close to the
airbag, or out of position.
The side airbag also poses risks. If
any part of a larger child’s body is in
the path of a deploying airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
Even with advanced front airbags,
the back seat is the safest place for a
child of any age or size.
When Can a Larger Child Sit in FrontUsing a Booster Seat
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
44
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly positioned and secured.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit over the hips, chest, and
shoulder (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
the child should not sit in the front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in the
front, there are other important
factors you should consider.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
Remind the child not to lean
toward the door.
17 42
Physical Size
Maturity
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Second Seat Installation:
Lift the head restraint, then route
the tether strap over the seat-back
between the legs of the head
restraint.
Your vehicle has tether anchorage
points for a tether-style child seat to
be installed on the second or third
row as shown.
Since a tether can provide additional
security, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available. (Tethers are required in
Canada.)
Each second row bucket seat has a
tether anchorage point on the
underside of the seat cushion.
Using Child Seats with Tethers
Driver and Passenger Safety
Protecting Children
46
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Third Seat Installation:
If you are not sure how to install the
tether, or you need mounting
hardware, contact your Honda dealer.
To attach the tether to the child seat,
follow the child seat maker’s
instructions.
If a torque wrench was not used, see
your Honda dealer as soon as
possible to verify proper installation.
When installing tether hardware,
make sure the toothed washer is on
the bottom of the bolt. Tighten the
bolt to:
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchorage point as shown in
the illustration, then tighten the
strap according to the child seat
maker’s instructions. Make sure the
strap is not twisted.
There are three anchorage points on
the tailgate sill. The tether hardware
is installed on the center anchorage
point.
If you want to use either of the
outside anchorage points, remove
the tether hardware from the center
anchorage point, remove the plug
from the anchorage point you are
going to use with a small flat-tipped
screwdriver, then install the tether
hardware.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
16 lbf·ft (22 N·m , 2.2 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put the child seat in a second row
vehicle seat and attach the child
seat to the lower anchors
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children) at the second
row seats. The lower anchors are
located between the seat-back and
seat bottom and are to be used only
with a child seat designed for use
with LATCH.
Make sure there are no foreign
objects around the anchors.
Foreign objects could get in the
way of a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Move the seat belt buckle or seat
belt tongue away from the lower
anchors.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
The exact location of each lower
anchorage is marked with a small
button above the lower anchorage
point.
1.
2.
3.
Using LATCH
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
48
RIGID TYPE
LOWER
ANCHORS
MARKS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Follow the child seat maker’s
instructions for any additional
advice on adjusting or tightening
the fit.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchorage point, and
tighten the strap according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Make sure the strap is not twisted.
This symbol on rear or forward
facing child seats or booster
cushions indicates the presence of
LATCH compatible hardware.
4. 5.
6.
Protecting Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
Lower Universal Anchorage
System Symbol
49
FLEXIBLE TYPE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To unlock the belt, push the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched.
Guide the belt across your body so
that it retracts completely. After
exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt
is out of the way and will not get
closed in the door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
Your vehicle has two types of lap/
shoulder belts. The center position
of the third seat has a combination of
a lap belt and a shoulder belt. For
maximum safety, they are designed
to be used together.
All other seating positions have a
one-piece lap/shoulder belt. This
seat belt goes over your shoulder,
across your chest and across your
hips.
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all seven seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
The seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not
fastened before the ignition is turned
ON (II), the light will come on and a
beeper will also sound. The beeper
will stop after a few seconds, but the
light will stay on until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened.
Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
50
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The combination lap belt and
shoulder belt in the center position
of the third seat goes over your
shoulder, across your chest and over
your hips. The shoulder belt has an
emergency locking retractor that
works in combination with the lap
belt.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s and the center position
of the third seat have an additional
locking mechanism that must be
activated to secure a child seat. (See
pages and for instructions on
how to secure child seats with this
type of seat belt.)
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
will retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the belt, pull it out only as
far as needed.
See page for instructions on how
to wear the lap/shoulder belt
properly.
To fasten the seat belt, unlatch the
metal plate of the shoulder belt from
the anchor on the ceiling and extend
the belt by pulling the metal plate.
Attach the metal hook on the edge of
the shoulder belt to the metal loop
on the latch plate of the lap belt
marked CENTER, then tug on the
shoulder belt to make sure it is
securely attached.
Insert the latch plate of the lap belt
into the buckle marked CENTER,
then tug on the lap belt to make sure
the buckle is latched.
To unlock the belt, push the red
PRESS button on the buckle and
detach the shoulder belt from the lap
belt.
See page for how to lengthen the
lap belt, and how to properly position
the lap and shoulder belts.
39
17
18
35
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The tensioners are designed to
activate primarily in frontal collisions.
The tensioners are independent of
the airbag system, so they can be
activated during a collision that
might not cause the airbags to
deploy. In this case, the airbags
would not be needed but the
additional seat belt tension can be
helpful.
The tensioners will be activated in a
collision severe enough to cause the
front airbags to inflate.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled in the normal
way.
The SRS indicator light will
come on if there is a
problem with your automatic seat
belt tensioners (see page ).
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
59
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
52
Main Menu
Table of Contents
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
that the lap/shoulder belts retract
easily. Any belt not in good condition
or not working properly will not
provide good protection and should
be replaced as soon as possible.
For information on how to clean your
seat belts, see page .
Automatic seat belt tensioners that
deployed during a crash must be
replaced.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed.
Honda provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts. Honda will repair or
replace any seat belt component that
fails to function properly during
normal use. Please see your
booklet for
details.
347
Honda
Warranty Information
Seat Belt Maintenance
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
U.S. Models
53
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) includes:
Automatic seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
Two front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG.’’
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe frontal
collision.
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, and driver and
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition is ON (II).
52
SRS Components
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
54
(1) Driver’s Airbag
(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Front Sensor
(9) Passenger Airbag Cutoff Indicator
(5) (9)
(2)
(8)
(3)
(7)
(4)
(4)
(1)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
During a frontal crash, your seat
belts help restrain your lower body
and torso. Your airbag provides a
cushion to help restrain and protect
your head and chest.
Since both airbags use the same
sensors, both airbags normally
inflate at the same time. However, it
is possible for only one airbag to
inflate.
This can occur when the severity of
a collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, the sensors
will detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration. If the rate of
deceleration is high enough, the
control unit will instantly inflate the
front airbags.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
stage, dual-threshold airbags to help
reduce the chance of airbag-caused
injuries.
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the driver’s seat position
and adjusts the inflation and
timing of the driver’s airbag (see
page ).
Front passenger’s weight sensors
that monitor the weight on the
seat. These prevent the passenger’s
airbag from inflating if the weight
is less than about 65 lbs (30 kg)
(see page ).
An indicator light on the
instrument panel that alerts you to
a possible problem with the
system (see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
56
57
59
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
How Your Front Airbags Work
55
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The total time for inflation and
deflation is approximately one-tenth
of a second, so fast that most
occupants are not aware that the
airbags deployed until they see them
lying in their laps.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
Your vehicle has a driver’s seat
position sensor as a part of the
advanced airbag system. The sensor
is located under the driver’s seat.
This sensor monitors the driver’s
seat sliding position and sends the
information to the control unit. If the
seat is too far forward, the control
unit will control the inflation of the
driver’s airbag.
Do not put any cargo or metal
objects under the driver’s seat, and
do not cover the sensor with
anything, including the rear seat
passenger’s feet.
This will cause the sensor to work
improperly and will damage it.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
56
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If there is a problem in the sensor,
the SRS indicator in the instrument
panel comes on. In this case, the
driver’s airbag will inflate normally
during a crash regardless of the
driver’s seating position.
Your vehicle has front passenger’s
weight sensors as a part of the
advanced airbag system. They are
located under both of the front
passenger’s seat rails. These sensors
monitor the total weight on the seat.
If there is no passenger in the front
passenger’s seat, the passenger
airbag cutoff indicator does not
come on, however the system shuts
off the front passenger’s airbag.
If the total weight on the seat is
about65lbs(30kg)orless,the
system shuts off the front passenger’s
airbag and the passenger airbag
cutoff indicator comes on. It reminds
you that the front passenger’s airbag
will not inflate during a crash.
CONTINUED
Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
57
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seat sensors may not work properly
if:
Be careful not to spill any liquids.
Spilled liquids could damage the
sensors under the front seats.
If your vehicle sustains a severe
impact, have the driver’s seat
position sensor and the front
passenger’s weight sensors
inspected by your Honda dealer.
You do not wear your seat belt
properly.
You do not sit upright and as far
back as possible from the steering
wheel or the dashboard (see page
).
You do not secure the child seat
properly, and move the front seat
as far back as possible.
For additional information on how
your airbags work, see the booklet
titled
that came with your
owner’s manual.
For additional information on how
your airbags work, ask your dealer
for a copy of the booklet titled20
SRS: What You Need to Know
About Airbags
SRS:
What You Need to Know About Airbags
.
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Information About Your Airbags
U.S.Owners
Canadian Owners
58
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with side
airbags for the driver and a front
seat passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the front
seat-backs, and both are marked
‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, the sensors will
detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
The SRS indicator light
alerts you to a potential
problem with your front airbags and
automatic seat belt tensioners.
This light will also alert you to a
potential problem with your side
airbags, passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system (see page
), or the driver’s seat position
sensor and the front passenger’s
weight sensors (see pages and
).
When you turn the ignition ON (II),
this indicator will light briefly then
go out. This tells you that the system
is working properly.
60
57
62
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
How Your Side Airbags Work How the SRS Indicator Light
Works
Additional Information About Your Airbags
59
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the light comes on at any other
time, or does not come on at all, you
should have the system checked by
your dealer. For example:
If the light stays on after the
engine starts.
If the light comes on or flashes on
andoffwhileyoudrive.
This light alerts you that
the passenger’s side airbag
has been automatically shut off.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in the front, this
system is designed to shut off the
side airbag if a child leans sideways
and the child’s head is in the side
airbag deployment path.
If the SRS indicator light does not
come on after you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II).
If you see any of these indications,
your front or side airbags may not
deploy, your passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system may not
work properly, your seat belt
tensioners may not work, or the
sensors under the front seats may
not work properly when you need
them. See your Honda dealer as soon
as possible.
It does not mean there is a problem
with your side airbags. It means that
thesideairbagcutoffsystemhas
activated to prevent the side airbag
from deploying.
To reduce the risk of injury from an
inflating side airbag, your vehicle has
an automatic cutoff system for the
passenger’s side airbag.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
How the Side Airbag Cutoff
Indicator Light Works
60
Ignoring the SRS indicator light
can result in serious injury or
death if the airbags, cutoff
system, or tensioners do not
work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS light alerts you to a
potential problem.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a small-statured adult leans
sideways, or larger adult slouches
and leans sideways into the
deployment path of the side airbag,
the system may also shut off the side
airbag.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the indicator should light
briefly and go out (see page ). If it
doesn’t light, stays on, or comes on
while driving without a passenger in
the front seat, have the system
checked.
If the side airbag cutoff indicator
light comes on, you should have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the deployment
path of the side airbag, the system
will turn the airbag back on and the
light will go out.
73
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
61
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This light alerts you that the front
passenger’s airbag is shut off.
If the light is on, it does not mean
there is a problem with the front
passenger’s airbag. If there is a
problem in the weight sensors, the
SRS indicator in the instrument
panel comes on. In this case, the
passenger airbag cutoff indicator
turns off, and the front passenger’s
airbag will inflate during a crash.
To reduce the chance of airbag-
caused injuries, the system shuts off
the front passenger’s airbag when
the total weight on the front
passenger’s seat is about 65 lbs
(30 kg) or less. The passenger
airbag cutoff indicator comes on to
remind you the front passenger’s
airbag will not inflate during a crash.
If there is no passenger in the front
passenger’s seat, this indicator does
not come on, however the system
shuts off the front passenger’s
airbag.
If this indicator comes on with no
passenger in the front passenger’s
seat,orwithanadultintheseat,
there may be a problem in the
advanced airbag system. Have the
vehicle checked by the dealer as
soon as possible.
This indicator may come on or off
repeatedly, if some objects are put
on the front passenger’s seat, or if
the temperature of the vehicle’s
interior changes suddenly when a
door is opened.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
How the Passenger Airbag Cutoff
Indicator Works
62
PASSENGER AIRBAG CUTOFF
INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
To ensure the front passenger’s seat
weight sensors keep the passenger’s
airbag activated when an adult or
large child weighing about 65 lbs/
30 kg or more sits in the front
passenger’s seat, do not allow
anything to decrease the weight on
the seat. This includes, but is not
limited to, these examples:
Front passenger’s seat forcibly
moved backward into luggage or
other items placed behind it.
Front passenger’s seat forcibly
pushed up by luggage or other
items placed under it.
Rear passengers pushing up the
frontpassenger’sseatwiththeir
feet.
If a passenger is tall enough to use
the seat belt and sit properly, but the
passenger airbag cutoff indicator
comes on and off repeatedly, we
recommend that the passenger sits
in a rear seat. If the passenger must
sit on the front seat, move the seat
as far to the rear as possible, have
the passenger sit upright, and make
sure the seat belt is worn securely.
To ensure the front passenger’s seat
weight sensors keep the passenger’s
airbag deactivated when an infant or
small child weighing about 65 lbs/
30 kg or less sits in the front
passenger’s seat, do not allow
anything to increase the weight on
the seat. This includes, but is not
limited to, these examples:
Rear passengers pushing or
pulling the front passenger’s seat-
back or pushing the seat rails with
their feet.
Heavy items placed in the front
passenger’s seat-back pocket.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
63
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the passenger airbag cutoff
indicator does not light, or comes on
and off repeatedly while a child seat
is secured on the front passenger’s
seat, remove the child seat, then
secure it on a rear seat.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the passenger airbag cutoff
indicator will light briefly then go out.
This tells you that the system is
working properly.
The indicator may come on or off a
few seconds later if the weight on
the front passenger’s seat changes.
Your front and side airbag systems
are virtually maintenance-free, and
there are no parts you can safely
service. However, you must have
your vehicle serviced if:
Any
airbag that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit, automatic seat belt
tensioners, and other related parts.
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by a Honda dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
Take your vehicle to
an authorized Honda dealer as
soon as possible. If you ignore this
indication, the airbags might not
inflate when you need them.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
Airbag Service
Your airbags ever inflate.
The SRS indicator light alerts you
to a problem.
64
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
If rain or spilled water
soaks into a seat-back, it can
prevent the side airbag system
from working properly.
This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor and
the front passenger’s weight
sensors ineffective.
Improperly
replacing or covering front seat-
back covers can prevent your side
airbags from inflating during a
collision.
This could make the driver’s seat
position sensor and the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective.
See page for further information
and precautions relating to your
airbags.
first contact American
Honda at 800-999-1009.
252Additional Safety Precautions
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not expose the front seat-backs
to water.
Do not place any items under the
front seats.
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting a
Honda dealer.
Do not modify the front seats.
If it is necessary to modify an
advanced front airbag system to
accommodate a person with
disabilities,
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
65
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. You should
have no problem with carbon
monoxide entering the vehicle in
normal driving if you maintain your
vehicle properly.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the under-
side.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
With the tailgate open, air flow can
pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
tailgate open, open all the windows
and set the heating and cooling
system/climate control system as
shown below.
Select the Fresh Air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle,
even in an unconfined area, with the
engine running, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
66
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read, contact your Honda dealer
for a replacement.
U.S. models only
U.S. models
Canadian models
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
67
RADIATOR CAP
SUN VISOR
HOOD
DASHBOARD
Main Menu
Table of Contents
68
Main Menu
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your Honda. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 70
...............................Indicator Lights . 71
.............................................Gauges . 78
Controls Near the Steering
.......................................Wheel . 81
...................................Headlights . 82
Automatic Lighting Off
.....................................Feature . 83
............Daytime Running Lights . 83
....Instrument Panel Brightness . 83
................................Turn Signals . 84
.....................Windshield Wipers . 84
..................Windshield Washers . 86
Rear Window Wiper and
.....................................Washer . 86
..........................Hazard Warning . 87
.............Rear Window Defogger . 87
......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 88
...............................Keys and Locks . 89
..............................................Keys . 89
....................Immobilizer System . 90
............................Ignition Switch . 91
......................Power Door Locks . 92
...................Remote Transmitter . 94
..............Childproof Door Locks . 98
........................................Tailgate . 98
..................................Glove Box . 100
...................Manual Sliding Doors . 101
.....................Power Sliding Doors . 103
...............................................Seats . 109
....................Passenger Seating . 109
......................Seat Adjustments . 110
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
............................Adjustment . 112
Driver’s Seat Power
..........................Adjustments . 113
.........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 114
....................................Armrests . 115
........................Head Restraints . 115
.....................Third Seat Access . 116
Moving the Second Row
...........................Bucket Seat . 117
Removing the Bucket Seats
................in the Second Row . 119
Folding the Third Row
.........................‘‘Magic Seat’’ . 120
..................................Seat Heaters . 123
............................Power Windows . 124
...........................................Mirrors . 128
...............................Parking Brake . 129
..................................Digital Clock . 130
..................................Center Table . 130
.........................Beverage Holders . 132
........................Sunglasses Holder . 134
........................................Sun Visor . 134
................................Vanity Mirror . 135
.......................Rear Compartment . 135
...............................Center Pocket . 136
...................................Coin Holder . 136
...................................Storage Box . 137
......................................Coat Hook . 137
............Accessory Power Sockets . 138
...............................Interior Lights . 139
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
69
Main Menu
Control Locations
Instruments and Controls
70
MIRROR
CONTROLS
DIGITAL CLOCK
HEATING/COOLING CONTROLS
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
HOOD RELEASE HANDLEFUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
(P.103)
(P.128)
(P.130)
(P.144)
(P.152)
(P.166)
(P.169, 181, 201, 217)
(P.246)
(P.245)
(P.123)
(P.124)
(P.92)
POWER SLIDING
DOOR SWITCHES
REAR A/C
UNITCONTROL
AUDIO SYSTEM/
REAR ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
DOOR LOCKS
WITCHES
SEAT HEATER
SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
71
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG
CUTOFF
INDICATOR
LOW FUEL
INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER LIGHT
DOOR AND BRAKE LAMP MONITOR
POWER SLIDING
DOOR INDICATOR
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
INDICATOR
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.74)
(P.74)
(P.80)
(P.77)
(P.76)
(P.73)
(P.74)
(P.72)
(P.73)
(P.77)
(P.73)
(P.75)
(P.75)
(P.371)
(P.72, 369)
(P.72, 370)
(P.234)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This light has two functions:
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch ON (II). It
is a reminder to check the parking
brake. Driving with the parking
brake not fully released can
damage the brakes and tires.
If this light comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For complete
information, see page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this light flashes or stays on when
the engine is running. For complete
information, see page .
See page .
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle.
If the indicator remains lit after
you have fully released the
parking brake while the engine is
running, or if it comes on while
driving, it can indicate a problem
in the brake system. For complete
information, see page .
1.
2.
371
369
370
373
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Charging System
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
72
U.S. Canada
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to you and your passengers
to protect yourselves by fastening
the seat belts. A beeper also sounds
if you have not fastened your seat
belt.
If you do not fasten your seat belt,
the beeper will stop after a few
seconds but the light stays on until
you do. Both the light and the beeper
stay off if you fasten your seat belt
before turning on the ignition.
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags or automatic seat
belt tensioners. This light will also
alert you to a potential problem with
your side airbags, passenger’s side
airbag automatic cutoff system,
driver’s seat position sensor, or front
passenger’s weight sensors. For
complete information, see page .
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For complete information, see page
.60
59
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Side Airbag Cutoff
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder Light
73
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This light normally comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II), and when
the ignition switch is turned to
START (III). If this light comes on at
any other time, there is a problem in
theABS.Ifthishappens,takethe
vehicle to your dealer to have it
checked. With the light on, your
vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock. For complete
information, see page .
This indicator has three functions:
This light also comes on when you
turn the ignition ON (II) and goes off
after the engine starts. See page
for more information on the
TCS.
Ifitcomesonandstaysonwhen
the Traction Control System is on,
it indicates that there is a problem
in the TCS.
It flashes when the TCS is
regulating wheelspin.
Itcomesonasareminderthatyou
have turned off the Traction
Control System.
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch ON (II). It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properly-
coded key, the indicator will blink
and the engine will not start (see
page ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
1.
2.
3.
90
268
269
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Traction Control System
(TCS) Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
74
U.S. Canada
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch ON (II). If it comes on at any
other time, there is a problem in the
power sliding door system. With this
light on, move the main switch on
the dashboard to the OFF position,
and have the system checked by
your Honda dealer as soon as
possible. You can still open or close
each sliding door manually. For
more information on the power
sliding doors, see page .
The appropriate light comes on in
this display if the tailgate or any door
is not closed tightly. If a brake light
does not work, the
indicator comes on when you push
the brake pedal with the ignition
switch ON (II).
A burned out brake light is a hazard
when drivers behind you cannot tell
you are braking. Have your brake
lights repaired right away.
All the lights in the monitor display
come on when you turn the ignition
switch ON (II). The lights go off
after the engine starts and the
tailgate and all doors are closed
tightly.
103
EX and EX-L models only
Power Sliding Door
Indicator
Door and Brake Lamp Monitor
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
75
BRAKE LAMP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This light comes on with the high
beam headlights. See page for
information on the headlight
controls.
On Canadian models, this indicator
comes on with reduced brightness
when the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) are on (see page ).
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) with
the headlight switch off and the
parking brake set. It should go off if
youturnontheheadlightsorrelease
the parking brake. If it comes on at
any other time, it means there is a
problem with the DRL. There may
also be a problem with the high
beam headlights.
The left or right turn signal light
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the light does not blink or
blinks rapidly, it usually means one
of the turn signal bulbs is burned out
(see page ). Replace the bulb as
soon as possible, since other drivers
cannot see that you are signaling.
WhenyouturnontheHazard
Warning switch, both turn signal
lights blink. All turn signals on the
outside of the vehicle should flash.
333
82
83
Canadian models only
High Beam Indicator ‘‘Daytime Running
Lights’’ Indicator
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
76
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This lights when you set the cruise
control. See page for information
on operating the cruise control.
This light comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this light come on
(see page ).
This light comes on as a reminder
that you must refuel soon.
306
235
Canadian models only
Indicator Lights
Instruments and Controls
Cruise Control Indicator Washer Level Indicator Low Fuel Indicator
77
Main Menu
Table of Contents
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
This shows your speed in miles per
hour (mph). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h).
This shows your speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in miles per
hour (mph).
The tachometer shows the engine
speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm). To protect the engine from
damage, never drive with the
tachometer needle in the red zone.
The odometer shows the total dis-
tance your vehicle has been driven.
It measures miles in U.S. models and
kilometers in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
Speedometer
Odometer
Tachometer
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
78
TACHOMETER
SPEEDOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
TRIP METER SELECT/RESET BUTTON
TRIP METER
MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED INDICATOR
ODOMETER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This shows how much fuel you have.
It is most accurate when the vehicle
is on level ground. It may show
slightly more or less than the actual
amount when you are driving on
curvy or hilly roads.
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to near
the upper white mark. If it reaches
the red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the
side of the road. Turn to page for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the Select/
Reset button repeatedly. Each trip
meter works independently, so you
can keep track of two different
distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the Select/Reset
button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’.
The needle returns to the bottom
after you turn off the ignition. The
gauge shows the fuel level reading
immediately after you turn the
ignition switch back ON (II).
366
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
Trip Meter Temperature Gauge Fuel Gauge
79
Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules
for Normal and Severe Driving
Conditions on pages and .
For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)
after the Maintenance Required
Indicator is reset, it will come on for
two seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II).
Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and
7,500 miles (12,000 km) this
indicator will light for two seconds
when you first turn the ignition
switch to ON (II), and then flash for
ten seconds.
If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000
km) without having the scheduled
maintenance performed, this
indicator will remain on as a constant
reminder.
Your dealer will reset this indicator
after completing the scheduled
maintenance. If this maintenance is
done by someone other than your
Honda dealer, reset the indicator as
follows.
Turn off the engine.
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Press and hold the select/reset
buttonintheinstrumentpanel,
then turn the ignition switch ON
(II).
Hold the button until the indicator
resets (approximately ten
seconds).
1.
2.
3.
288 290
Gauges
Maintenance Required Indicator
Instruments and Controls
80
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED
INDICATOR
SELECT/RESET BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
Thetwoleversonthesteering
column contain controls for driving
features you use most often. The left
lever controls the turn signals,
headlights, and high beams. The
right lever controls the windshield
washers and wipers.
The switches for the hazard warning
lights and rear window defogger are
located to the right of the steering
column.
The controls under the left air vent
arefortheTCS,thecruisecontrol,
the power sliding doors and the
power mirrors.
The tilt adjustment lever on the
underside of the steering column
allows you to tilt the steering wheel.
To use the horn, press the pad
around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
Instruments and Controls
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
81
POWER SLIDING DOOR
(EX and EX-L models)
TRACTION
CONTROL SYSTEM
HAZARD
WARNING
LIGHTS
PASSENGER AIRBAG
CUTOFF INDICATOR
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
SHIFT
LEVER
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
LIGHT CONTROL
SWITCH
HORN
TILT
ADJUSTMENT
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
CRUISE
CONTROL
MIRROR
CONTROL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you leave the lights on with the
ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)
or LOCK (0), you will hear a
reminder chime when you open the
driver’s door.
To change between low beams and
high beams, pull the turn signal lever
until you hear a click, then let go.
The blue high beam indicator will
light (see page ).
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal lever back lightly, then
release it. The high beams will come
on and go off.
The high beams will stay on for as
long as you hold the lever back, no
matter what position the headlight
switch is in.
The rotating switch on the left lever
controls the lights. Turning this
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns
on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate light.
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights.
76
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Headlights
82
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Automatic Lighting Off feature
turns off the headlights, parking
lights, taillights, side marker lights,
license plate lights and instrument
panel lights within 15 seconds of
removing the key from the ignition
switch and closing the driver’s door.
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, you will hear a lights-on
reminder chime.
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) and
release the parking brake. They
remain on until you turn the ignition
off, even if you set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
The knob on the instrument panel
controls the brightness of the instru-
ment panel lights. Turn the knob to
adjust the brightness.
This feature activates if you leave
the headlight switch in the or
position, remove the key, open,
then close the driver’s door.
If you remove the key from the
ignition switch with the headlight
switch on, but do not open the door
and get out, the lights will turn off
after 10 minutes.
On EX and EX-L models
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
Daytime Running Lights
(Canadian Models)
Instrument Panel Brightness
83
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Signal a turn or lane change with this
lever. Push down on the lever to
signal a left turn, and up to signal a
right turn. If you push it up or down
all the way, the turn signal continues
to blink even when you release the
lever. It shuts off automatically as
you complete the turn.
To signal a lane change, push lightly
on the turn signal lever in the proper
direction and hold it. The lever will
return to the center position as soon
as you release it.
The right lever controls the wind-
shield wipers and washers. The
rotary switch at the end of the lever
has three positions;
INT: intermittent
: low speed
: high speed
Turn Signals Windshield Wipers
Instruments and Controls
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
84
TURN SIGNAL LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To operate the wipers in mist mode,
push the control lever down. The
wipers run at high speed until you
release the lever. This gives you a
quick way to clear the windshield.
In intermittent, the wipers operate
every few seconds. You can vary
how often the wipers sweep the
windshield by turning the INT TIME
ring next to the rotary switch. The
sweep interval will change slightly
with speed; getting shorter as you
drive faster. In low speed
intermittent and high speed driving,
the wipers run continuously.
If you turn the INT TIME ring to the
shortest delay, the wipers will
change from intermittent to low
speed operation when vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
85
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The rear window wiper switch is
located next to the windshield wiper
switch.
To clean the windshield, pull back on
the wiper control lever. The washers
spray until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed while you’re
pulling the lever, then complete one
more sweep of the windshield after
you release it.
To activate the rear windshield wiper,
turn the switch ‘‘ON’’. If you turn the
switch ‘‘ON’’, the rear windshield
wiper swings twice and then will
sweep the glass approximately every
seven seconds. If you wish to use the
wiper and washer, turn and hold the
switch one position up from ‘‘ON’’.
Therearwindowwasherusesthe
same fluid reservoir as the wind-
shield washer.
Rear Window Wiper and WasherWindshield Washers
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
86
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The light above
the button lights to show the
defogger is on. If you do not turn it
off, the defogger will shut itself off
after about 15 minutes. It also shuts
off when you turn off the ignition.
You have to turn it on again when
you restart the vehicle.
Push the button to the left of the
clocktoturnonthehazardwarning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both indicators in the instrument
panel to flash. Use the hazard
warning lights if you need to park in
a dangerous area near heavy traffic,
or if your vehicle is disabled.
CONTINUED
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning
87
EX and EX-L models
Vehicles with Navigaition System
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for important safety
information about how to properly
position the steering wheel.
20
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in that position.
Move the steering wheel to the
desired position, making sure the
wheel points toward your chest,
not toward your face. Make sure
you can see the instrument panel
gauges and the indicator lights.
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
To adjust the steering wheel upward
or downward:
Thedefoggerwiresontheinsideof
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side to side.
3.
4.
1.
2.
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment
88
LX model
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle comes with two master
keys and a valet key.
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle:
• Ignition
• Doors
•GloveBox
• Tailgate
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number plate with your keys. You
will need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Keep
the plate stored in a safe place. If you
need to replace a key, use only
Honda-approved key blanks.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
Immobilizer System. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them immedi-
ately with a soft cloth.
The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
The valet key works only in the
ignition, the door locks and the
tailgate. You can keep the glove box
locked when you leave your vehicle
and the valet key at a parking facility.
Some models also come with two
remote transmitters; see page for
an explanation of their operation.
94
Keys
Remote Transmitter
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
89
KEY
NUMBER
PLATE
MASTER
KEYS
(BLACK)
VALET KEY
(GRAY)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Immobilizer System protects
your vehicle from theft. A properly-
coded master or valet key must be
used in the ignition switch for the
engine to start. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the Immobilizer System
indicator should come on for a few
seconds, then go out. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert
it, and turn the switch to ON (II)
again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object is near the
ignition switch when you insert the
key. To make sure the system
recognizes the key code:
Do not keep other immobilizer
keys on the same key ring.
Use a plastic or leather key fob,
not metal.
Keep other keys away from your
vehicle’s key and the ignition
switch while trying to start the
engine.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your Honda dealer.
The Immobilizer System indicator
will also blink several times when
you turn the ignition switch from ON
(II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undriveable.
If you have lost your key and you
cannot start the engine, contact your
Honda dealer.
Immobilizer System
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
90
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may sometimes make
it difficult to turn the key from
LOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turn
the steering wheel to the left or to
the right as you turn the key.
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To switch from ACCESSORY to
LOCK, you must push the key in
slightly as you turn it. The shift lever
must also be in Park. The anti-theft
lock will lock the steering column
when you remove the key.
The ignition switch is on the right
side of the steering column. It has
four positions:
•LOCK(0)
• ACCESSORY (I)
• ON (II)
• START (III)
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
CONTINUED
LOCK (0)Ignition Switch
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
91
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
− Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to ON (II) when you let go of
the key.
This is the normal key
position when driving. All features
and accessories on the vehicle are
usable. Several of the lights on the
instrument panel come on as a test
when you turn the ignition switch
from ACCESSORY to ON.
The engine will not start if the
Immobilizer System does not
recognize the key’s coding (see page
).
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
thedriver’sdoor.Removethekeyto
turn off the beeper.
Each front door has a master door
lock switch. Either switch locks and
unlocks all doors and the tailgate.
Push the switch down to lock all
doors and the tailgate, and up to
unlock them.
In this position,
you can operate the audio system
and the accessory power sockets.
90
START (III) Power Door Locks
ON (II)
ACCESSORY (I)
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
92
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Each front door has a lock tab on the
top. When you push down the lock
tab on the driver’s door, all the doors
and the tailgate lock. Pulling up the
lock tab on the driver’s door unlocks
only that door. The lock tab on the
front passenger’s door locks and
unlocks only that door.
To lock the front passenger’s door
when getting out of the vehicle, push
the lock tab down and close the door.
To lock the driver’s door, along with
the remaining doors and the tailgate,
push the lock tab down or push the
master switch down, then close the
door.
All doors and the tailgate can be
locked from the outside by using the
key in either front door. To unlock
only the driver’s door from the
outside, turn the key and release it.
If you turn the key and hold it, all
doors and the tailgate will unlock. All
four doors and the tailgate will
unlock when you unlock the
passenger’s door with the key.
If you forget and leave the key in the
ignition switch, Lockout Prevention
will not allow you to lock the driver’s
door. With the driver’s door open
andthekeyintheignition,both
master door lock switches are
disabled. However, if the driver’s
door is not open, the master door
lock switches are not disabled.
Pushing the switch down on the
open passenger’s door will lock all
doors and the tailgate. If you try to
lock an open driver’s door by
pushinginthelocktab,thetabson
both front doors pop out and the lock
knobs on the rear sliding doors slide
out.Pushinginthelocktabonthe
passenger’s door only locks that door.
Lockout Prevention
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
93
LOCK TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you push the UNLOCK button
once, only the driver’s door unlocks.
The remaining doors and the tailgate
unlock when you push the button a
second time. The parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights and
instrument panel lights flash twice
when you push the button the first
time.
If you unlock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter,
but do not open any door or the
tailgate within 30 seconds, all doors
and the tailgate automatically relock.
You cannot lock the doors and the
tailgate with the remote transmitter
if any door or the tailgate is not fully
closed. You cannot lock or unlock
thedoorsandthetailgatewiththe
key in the ignition switch.
You can lock and unlock your vehicle
with the remote transmitter. When
you push the LOCK button, all doors
and the tailgate lock. The parking
lights, side marker lights, taillights
and instrument panel lights flash
once.
When you press the UNLOCK
button, the front and rear individual
map lights and the cargo area light,
depending on their switch positions,
will come on (see page ). If you
do not open any door or the tailgate,
the lights stay on for about 10
seconds, then go out. If you relock
thedoorsandthetailgatewiththe
remote transmitter before 10
seconds have elapsed, the lights will
go off immediately.
140
On EX and EX-L models
Remote Transmitter
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
94
LED
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youcanopenorcloseeachrear
sliding door with the remote
transmitter. The right button
controls the passenger’s side door
and the left button controls the
driver’s side door.
If the power sliding door MAIN
switch on the dashboard is in the
OFF position, you cannot open or
close the sliding doors with the
remote transmitter.
Panic mode allows you to remotely
activate your vehicle’s horn and
lights to attract attention. When
activated, the horn will sound, and
the headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights and
instrument panel lights will flash for
about 30 seconds. To activate panic
mode,pressandholdthePANIC
button for about one second.
To cancel Panic mode before 30
seconds, press any button on the
remote transmitter. You can also
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Panic mode will not activate if the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
CONTINUED
Opening or Closing the Power Sliding
Doors
Panic Mode
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
95
DRIVER’S
SIDE
SLIDING
DOOR
BUTTON
LED
PASSENGER’S
SIDE
SLIDING
DOOR
BUTTON
POWER SLIDING DOOR MAIN SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
▽
◎
To replace the battery, remove the
round cover on the back of the trans-
mitter by turning it counterclockwise
with a coin.
Remove the old battery and note the
polarity. Make sure the polarity of
the new battery is the same ( side
facing up), then insert it in the
transmitter.
When the remote transmitter’s
battery begins to get weak, it may
take several pushes on the button to
lock or unlock the doors and tailgate,
and the LED will not light. Replace
the battery as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR2025
Reinstall the cushion ring. Align the
mark on the cover with the
mark on the transmitter,
thensetthecoverinplaceandturnit
clockwise.
Replacing the Battery
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
96
Open
Close
ROUND
COVER
CUSHION
RING
BATTERY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Avoid severe shock to the trans-
mitter, such as dropping or throwing
it. Also, protect it from extreme hot
or cold temperatures.
Clean the transmitter case with a
soft cloth. Do not use strong
cleaners or solvents that could harm
the case. Immersing the transmitter
in any liquid will harm the trans-
mitter and cause it to not function
properly.
If you lose a transmitter, you will
need to have the replacement
programmed to your vehicle’s
system by your Honda dealer. Any
other transmitters you have will also
need to be reprogrammed.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Transmitter Care
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
97
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear sliding doors. Each door has
a lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock
knob. To open the door, slide the
lock knob forward and use the
outside door handle.
With the childproof door locks on,
automatic operation with the inside
door handle is disabled.
Use your key to lock and unlock the
tailgate.
On the EX and EX-L models, you can
also lock and unlock the tailgate with
theremotetransmitter(seepage
).94
On EX and EX-L models
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
Childproof Door Locks Tailgate
98
Unlock
LOCK
LEVER
Lock
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To open the tailgate, pull the handle,
then lift up the tailgate.
To close the tailgate, pull the tailgate
down, then press down on the back
edge.
The tailgate also has a lock tab on
the inside.
To lock the tailgate without the key
or the remote transmitter, push the
lock tab down and close the tailgate.
See page for information on
cargo loading. Keep the tailgate
closed at all times while driving to
avoid damaging the tailgate and to
prevent exhaust gas from getting
into the interior. See
on page .66
253
Carbon
Monoxide Hazard
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
99
HANDLE
LOCK
TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the glove box by pulling the
bottom of the handle. Close it with a
firm push. Lock or unlock the glove
box with the master key.
Glove Box
Keys and Locks
Instruments and Controls
100
GLOVE BOX
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Honda is equipped with dual
sliding doors. Be sure all passengers
are clear of the sliding doors before
closing them.
Each sliding door has a lock knob
under the inside door handle. Slide
the lock knob forward to unlock, and
backward to lock.
Whenyoudrivewithchildreninyour
vehicle, use the childproof door
locks (see page ). This will
prevent children from opening the
doors accidentally.
To open a manual sliding door, pull
the inside or outside door handle and
slide the door back. It will latch in
the fully-open position.
To close the door, pull either handle
and slide the door closed. Make sure
the door is closed and latched
securely before driving. 98
CONTINUED
Manual Sliding Doors (LX Model)
Instruments and Controls
Locking the DoorsOpening and Closing the Doors
101
OUTSIDE
INSIDE
LOCK KNOB
Lock
Unlock
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before refueling, make sure the
driver’s side sliding door is fully
closed. When you release the fuel fill
door, the driver’s side sliding door
automatically locks so it cannot open
and interfere with the fuel door. If a
passenger attempts to unlock the
door by cycling the lock knob several
times, the door may unlock and can
be opened.
If a passenger needs to get out of the
vehicle while you are refueling,
instruct that person to exit on the
passenger’s side, not the driver’s
side.
After you close the fuel fill door, the
sliding door does not automatically
unlock. You must unlock it manually.
When parking facing downhill, make
sure the manual doors are latched in
the fully-open position, then hold the
door open while allowing your
passengers to enter or exit the
vehicle. Do not pull the inside or
outside door handle, or the latch will
release and the door will slam shut.
A Note About Refueling Parking Facing Downhill
Manual Sliding Doors (LX Model)
Instruments and Controls
102
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Honda is equipped with dual
power sliding doors. The doors on
the EX and EX-L models are
electrically powered and can be
operated with the remote transmitter,
the door handles, or the switches on
the dashboard.
Be sure all passengers are clear of
the sliding doors before closing them.
The power sliding doors operate
with the ignition switch in any
position. In addition:
If you shift out of Park while a door
is opening, you will hear a
continuous tone and the door will
stop moving. If you keep driving with
the door open, the tone continues
until you stop and close the door.
If you shift out of Park while a door
is closing, you will hear a beep until
the power sliding door closes
completely.
Make sure both sliding doors are
closed before you start driving.
To open the door with the inside
handle, the childproof door lock
on the door you want to operate
must be unlocked (see page ).
The sliding door you want to
operate must be unlocked.
The MAIN switch on the
dashboard must be in the ON
position.
TheshiftlevermustbeinPark.
98
CONTINUED
Power Sliding Doors (EX, EX-L Models)
Instruments and Controls
103
Closing a power sliding door
while any part of a passenger is
in the door’s path can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all passengers are
clear of the doorway before
closing a sliding door.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The dashboard switches to the left
of the steering column allow you to
open or close each sliding door. The
left switch controls the sliding door
on the left side, and the right switch
controls the sliding door on the right
side.
The MAIN switch on the dashboard
controls electrical power to the
sliding doors. During normal
operation, leave the MAIN switch in
the ON position.
When the MAIN switch is off, the
electrical power is off and you will
notbeabletousethedashboard
switches or the remote transmitter
to open or close the power sliding
doors.
When the MAIN switch is off, you
must operate each sliding door
manually. To open or close a door,
pull the inside or outside door handle
and slide the door. The door will be
difficulttomove;thisisnormal.Do
not use force or try to move the door
rapidly, you could damage the motor.
Operating the Doors With the
Dashboard Switches
About the Main Switch
Power Sliding Doors (EX, EX-L Models)
Instruments and Controls
104
POWER SLIDING DOOR MAIN SWITCH
POWER
SLIDING
DOOR
SWITCHES
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To open a sliding door, make sure
the door is unlocked. Then press the
appropriate button
. If you forget to unlock the
door first, you will hear three beeps.
Unlock the door and try again.
To close a sliding door, press the
appropriate button for at least two
seconds.
To stop the power sliding door’s
movement, push the appropriate
door button on the remote
transmitter. The door will stop, and
you will hear three beeps.
If you push the same button again,
the door will reverse direction.
To open a door, make sure the door
is unlocked. Then push and release
the bottom of the switch. If you
forget to unlock the door first, you
will hear three beeps. Unlock the
door and try again.
To close a sliding door, push and
release the top of the appropriate
switch.
To stop the power sliding door’s
movement, push either the top or the
bottom of the appropriate switch.
The door will stop, and you will hear
three beeps.
To start the door moving again, push
the switch again: bottom to open, or
toptoclose.
You can open or close each sliding
door with the remote transmitter.
The right button controls the
passenger’s side sliding door, and
the left button controls the driver’s
side sliding door.
for at least two
seconds
CONTINUED
Operating the Doors With the
Remote Transmitter
Power Sliding Doors (EX, EX-L Models)
Instruments and Controls
105
DRIVER’S
SIDE
SLIDING
DOOR
BUTTON
LED
PASSENGER’S
SIDE
SLIDING
DOOR
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Each power sliding door has an auto-
reverse feature. If a door meets
resistance while closing, it will beep
three times and automatically
reverse direction. However, the door
may not immediately reverse
direction (like some elevator doors),
and the force of a closing door may
cause bruising or discomfort. Always
make sure passengers and any
objects are well away from the power
sliding doors before closing them.
Also check that passengers,
especially children, do not have their
hands on the edge of the sliding door
or on the door pillar. The auto-
reverse feature stops working when
the door is about to latch so the
motor can pull the door shut.
With the sliding door fully-closed or
fully-open, pull the outside or inside
door handle, then release it.
Once the door begins to move, the
door handles cannot be used to stop
the door. If you need to stop the door
for any reason, use the dashboard
switches or the remote transmitter.
Each sliding door has a lock knob
under the inside door handle. Slide
the lock knob forward to unlock, and
backward to lock the doors. You can
also use the lock and unlock buttons
on the remote transmitter.
Whenyoudrivewithchildreninyour
vehicle, use the childproof door
locks (see page ). This will
prevent children from opening the
doors accidentally.
98
Operating the Doors With the Door
Handles
Locking the Doors Sliding Doors and Obstacles
Power Sliding Doors (EX, EX-L Models)
Instruments and Controls
106
OUTSIDE
INSIDE
LOCK KNOB
Unlock
Lock
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a person or object is in the way
after the door begins to close, the
door handles cannot be used to stop
the door. To stop the door, use the
dashboard switches or the remote
transmitter.
When parking facing downhill on a
steep grade, the power sliding doors
may not open or close as they do
normally.
Make sure the MAIN switch is in
the ON position. This allows the
power assist to keep the doors
from slamming shut.
If the MAIN switch is off, the door
can slam shut and possibly injure
someone.
Make sure the power sliding doors
are latched in the fully-open
position, then hold the door open
while allowing your passengers to
enter or exit the vehicle. Do not
pull the inside or outside door
handle, or the latch will release
and the door will close.
Before refueling, make sure the
driver’s side sliding door is fully
closed. When you release the fuel fill
door, the driver’s side sliding door
automatically locks so it cannot open
and interfere with the fuel door. If a
passenger attempts to unlock the
door by cycling the lock knob several
times, the door may unlock and can
be opened.
If a passenger needs to get out of the
vehicle while you are refueling,
instruct that person to exit on the
passenger’s side, not the driver’s
side.
After you close the fuel fill door, the
sliding door does not automatically
unlock. You must unlock it manually.
CONTINUED
Parking Facing DownhillA Note About Refueling
Power Sliding Doors (EX, EX-L Models)
Instruments and Controls
107
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the Power Sliding Door indicator
comes on and stays on, it indicates a
problem in the system. Turn the
MAIN switch off to turn off the
indicator. Have the system inspected
by your Honda dealer as soon as
possible.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead while a
sliding door is open, the power
sliding door system needs to be reset.
After reconnecting the battery:
If the power sliding doors are closed,
the system will reset itself
automatically once the battery has
been reconnected.
If the power sliding doors do not
operate properly after resetting,
have your vehicle checked by a
Honda dealer.
Close each sliding door completely
by hand; or
Move the MAIN switch on the
dashboard to the ON position.
Push and hold the top of each door
switch until each sliding door
closes completely.
Power Sliding Door IndicatorHow to Reset the Power Sliding
Doors
Power Sliding Doors (EX, EX-L Models)
Instruments and Controls
108
POWER SLIDING DOOR INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
There are bucket seats with
armrests for two front passengers,
bucket seats with armrests for two
passengers in the second row, and a
bench seat for three passengers in
the third row.
For greater cargo capacity, the seats
in the second row can be removed,
andthebenchseatinthethirdrow
can be folded into the floor.
Passenger Seating
Convertible Second Row Bucket
Seats
Seats
Instruments and Controls
109
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
13 15
The EX and EX-L models have a
power adjustable driver’s seat. All
other models have manual driver’s
seat adjustments.
The front passenger’s seat, and the
seats in the second and third rows
adjust manually.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the lever under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position and
releasethelever.Trytomovethe
seat to make sure it is locked in
position.
To adjust the bucket seats in the
second row, pull up on the lever on
the front of the seat bottom.
Seat Adjustments
Seats
Instruments and Controls
110
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To adjust the seat-back angle of the
third seat, open the tailgate. Pull on
the handle on the back of the seat-
back, move the seat-back to the
desired position, and release the
handle. Let the seat-back latch in the
new position.
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seats, pull up on the lever on
the outside of the seat bottom.
To change the seat-back angle of the
bucket seats in the second row, pull
forwardontheleverontheoutside
of the seat-back.
Seats
Instruments and Controls
111
HANDLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make all adjustments before you
start driving.
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. Turn the front dial on the
outside of the seat cushion to raise
the front of the seat bottom, and turn
the rear dial to raise the rear.
On LX model
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Adjustment
Seats
Instruments and Controls
112
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Pull up or push down on the front of
the switch to move the seat bottom’s
front edge up or down. Pull up or
push down on the rear of the switch
to move the rear of the seat bottom
up or down.
Push the horizontal switch forward
or backward to move the seat
forward or backward.
The two power seat adjustment
switches are on the outside edge of
the seat bottom. The horizontal
switch adjusts the seat bottom in
several directions. The short vertical
switch adjusts the seat-back angle.
You can adjust the seat with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
On EX and EX-L models
13 15
CONTINUED
Driver’s Seat Power Adjustments
Seats
Instruments and Controls
113
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pull the center of the horizontal
switch up to raise the seat. Push it
down to lower the seat.
Adjust the seat-back angle by
pushing the rear switch in the
direction you want to move. Vary the lumbar support by moving
the lever on the right side of the
seat-back. Move the lever forward or
backward to adjust the lumbar
support through its full range.
On EX and EX-L models
Driver’s Lumbar Support
Seats
Instruments and Controls
114
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint.Donotattempttoadjustit
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways and push
the restraint down.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions.
The head restraints help protect you
and your passengers from whiplash
and other injuries. They are most
effective when you adjust them so
the back of the occupant’s head rests
against the center of the restraint. A
taller person should adjust the
restraint as high as possible.
An armrest is located on each of the
frontseatsandoneachsideofthe
second row seats. Pivot it down to
use it. When you remove the bucket
seats in the second row, pivot the
armrests up out of the way.
See page for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
16
CONTINUED
Head RestraintsArmrests
Seats
Instruments and Controls
115
RELEASE
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the seat on the passenger’s
side is moved to the center, walk
through the passenger’s side to get
into or out of the third row seat.
To get into or out of the third row
seat, walk between the second row
seats.
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button
and pull the restraint out of the seat-
back.
Seats
Instruments and Controls
Third Seat Access
116
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The second row bucket seat on the
passenger’s side can be moved to the
center to provide access to the third
row seat.
Remove the two floor covers
between the bucket seats in the
second row by carefully prying on
the back edge of the covers with a
flat-tipped screwdriver.
Unlock the seat from the floor by
pulling the lock release lever under
the seat cushion’s front edge and
lifting the rear of the seat.
Slide the seat toward the center of
the vehicle.
Push the back of the seat down over
the floor hooks. Make sure the seat
is securely locked in place.
CONTINUED
Moving the Second Row Bucket
Seat
Seats
Instruments and Controls
117
LOCK
RELEASE
LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Install the floor covers over the outer
floor hooks on the passenger’s side
as shown.
Make sure the seat is securely
locked in place before driving. A seat
thatisnotlockedinplacecouldfly
around and cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash.
Reversethisproceduretomovethe
seat back to the outside.
Seats
Instruments and Controls
118
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Unhook the front of the seat from
the floor by pulling it back slightly,
then pivoting it upward.
Always remove an unlocked seat
from the vehicle before driving. A
seat that is not locked in place could
fly around and cause injury in a
sudden stop or crash.
Both seats can be removed to give
more cargo capacity.
To remove a seat:
Pull up the seat-back angle
adjustment lever, and fold the seat-
back forward.
Unlock the seat from the floor by
pulling the lock release lever under
the seat cushion’s front edge and
lifting the rear of the seat.
To reinstall the seat, hook the front
of the seat to the floor, then push the
back into the locks. Make sure both
the front and the back of the seat are
securely latched before driving.
Removing the Bucket Seats in the
Second Row
Seats
Instruments and Controls
119
LOCK RELEASE LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the head restraints by
pushing the release buttons and
pulling the restraints out.
To create more cargo space, you can
fold the third row ‘‘Magic Seat’’ into
the floor recess.
To fold the seat:
Make sure the head restraint legs
areinsidethecargonetsotheydo
not damage the seat as you fold it.
Store the head restraints in the
sidecargonet.Toinstalltheside
cargo net, hook the four loops on
the net to the tabs on the left side
panel.
Unlock the seat-back by pulling
the handle. Push the seat-back
forward.
1.
2. 3.
Folding the Third Row ‘‘Magic
Seat’’
Seats
Instruments and Controls
120
RELEASE BUTTON
HANDLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the center shoulder belt
is stored in the holder and the outer
shoulder belts are positioned on each
hook whenever the third seat is
folded.
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard. See
on page .
Pull the seat out of the recess by
pulling on the handle and the strap.
Pivot the seat forward all the way.
To return the seat to the upright
position:
Pull the handle on the back of the
seat cushion while you pull the
entire seat towards you with the
strap. Pivot the seat into the floor
recess. Make sure the strap is
above the seat.
4.
1.
253
CONTINUED
Carrying Cargo
Seats
Instruments and Controls
121
HANDLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Reinstall the head restraints.
Pull up on the handle on the seat-
back, and pull the seat-back
upright with the strap. Make sure
the seat is securely locked in place.
2.
3.
Seats
Instruments and Controls
122
HANDLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The HI or LO indicator lights and
remains lit until you turn it off by
pushing the opposite side of the
switch lightly. The indicator will turn
off.
In HI, the heater turns off when the
seat gets warm, and turns back on
after the seat’s temperature drops. It
continues to cycle as long as you
leave it set on HI. The HI indicator
remains lit as a reminder that you
have the heater on.
In LO, the heater runs continuously.
It does not cycle with temperature
changes.
Do not use the seat heaters, even
on the LO setting, if the engine is
left idling for an extended period.
They can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly. Select the LO
setting when the seats feel warm.
The HI setting draws large
amounts of current from the
battery.
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
Because of the sensors for the side
airbag system, there is no heater in
the passenger’s seat-back.
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The ignition switch
must be ON (II) to use them.The
seat heater switch is located on each
front door. Push the front of the
switch, HI, to rapidly heat up the seat.
After the seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the back of the switch. This will keep
the seat warm.
On EX-L model
Seat Heaters
Instruments and Controls
123
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s front windows are
electrically-powered. Turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) to raise or
lower either window.
Therearwindowsarealso
electrically-powered (see page ).
Each front door has a switch that
controls its window. To open the
window, push the switch down and
hold it. Release the switch when you
want the window to stop. Close the
window by pulling back on the
switch and holding it.
The driver’s door armrest has a
master power window control panel.
To open the front passenger’s
window, push down on the switch
and hold it down until the window
reaches the desired position. To
close the window, pull back on the
window switch. Release the switch
when the window gets to the position
you want.
127
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
124
MAIN SWITCH
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The master control panel also con-
tains these extra features:
To open the driver’s
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down, then release it.
The window automatically goes
down all the way. To stop the
window from going all the way down,
pull back on the window switch
briefly.
To close the driver’s window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly,
then release it. The window
automatically goes all the way up. To
stop the window from going all the
way up, push down on the window
switch briefly.
To open or close the driver’s window
partially, push down or pull back on
the window switch lightly and hold it.
The window will stop when you
release the switch.
The MAIN switch controls power to
the front passenger’s window and
the rear power windows. With this
switch off, the front passenger’s
window cannot be raised or lowered
and the rear windows cannot be
opened or closed. The MAIN switch
does not affect the driver’s window.
Keep the MAIN switch off when you
have children in the vehicle so they
do not injure themselves by
operating the windows
unintentionally.
CONTINUED
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
AUTO
125
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function will be disabled. The
power window system needs to be
reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse. You should do
the following.
Start the engine. Push down on
the driver’s window switch until
the window is fully open.
Pull back on the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for a second or two more.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by a Honda dealer.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
If the driver’s window runs into any
obstacle while it is closing
automatically, it will reverse
direction, and then stop. To close the
window, remove the obstacle, then
use the window switch again.
The power window system has a key-
off delay function. The windows will
stilloperateforuptotenminutes
after you turn off the ignition.
Opening either front door cancels
the delay function. You must turn
the ignition switch ON (II) again
before you can operate the windows.
1.
2.
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
Auto Reverse
126
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youcanopenorcloseeachrear
window with the switches on the
driver’s door armrest. The right
switch controls the passenger’s side
rear window and the left switch
controls the driver’s side window. To
open the window, push the switch
downandholdit.Releasetheswitch
when you want the window to stop.
Close the window by pulling back on
the switch and holding it.
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
127
REAR WINDOW SWITCHES
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns off the
adjustment switch so you can’t
move a mirror out of position by
accidentally bumping the switch.
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Adjust the outside mirrors with the
adjustment switch on the left side of
the dashboard:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
128
TAB
SELECTOR SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Canadian Models
The outside mirrors are heated to re-
move fog and frost. With the ignition
switchON(II),turnontheheaters
by pressing the button. The light in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
To apply the parking brake, push the
parking brake pedal down with your
foot. To release the parking brake,
push on the pedal again. The parking
brake light on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released with the
engine running. (see page .)72
Parking Brake
Mirrors, Parking Brake
Instruments and Controls
129
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Press and hold the H button until
the hour advances to the desired
time.
You can use R to quickly set the time
to the nearest hour. If the displayed
time is before the half hour, pressing
Rsetstheclockbacktotheprevious
hour. If the displayed time is after
the half hour, pressing R sets the
clock forward to the beginning of the
next hour.
For example:
1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
To use the center table, pull up the
outside edge of the table until it
latches. To store it, pull the lever and
lower the table.
Press and hold the M button until
the numbers advance to the
desired time.
To set the clock:
The digital clock displays the time
with the ignition switch in any
position.
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2.
3.
1.
On models without navigation system
Digital Clock Center Table
Digital Clock, Center Table
Instruments and Controls
130
HM R
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Thecentertablecanbeextendedby
pulling on the rear.
Sitting on or getting under the table,
or putting heavy objects on the table,
may damage or deform it.
Do not put any items on the table
while driving. They may fall down or
fly around when you go around
corners or brake hard.
Instruments and Controls
Center Table
131
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To use the front beverage holder,
pull on the bottom edge. Push the
holder all the way in to close it.
Additional beverage holders for the
front seat passengers, and beverage
holders for the passengers in the
second row, are in the center table.
Instruments and Controls
Beverage Holders
132
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Each second row seat has a
beverage holder on the outside of
the seat cushion. To use the
beverage holder, push on the tab.
The beverage holder will swing open.
To close, pivot it up and push it in
until it latches.
The beverage holders for the third
seat passengers are located in the
armrests on the rear side panels.
To protect the beverage holder, the
bottom tray is designed to break
away if you try to place a heavy
object on it. If this happens, hold the
edge of the bottom tray and pull it up
until you feel a detent.
Be careful not to damage an open
beverage holder when you get into
or out of the vehicle.
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holder. A spilled liquid that
is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can also
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
The inner liner can be removed if
youwanttoholdalargercup.
Instruments and Controls
Beverage Holders
133
TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the front edge. It will unlatch and
swing down. To close it, push it until
it latches. Make sure the holder is
closed while you are driving.
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
You can also use the sun visor at the
side window. Remove the support
rod from the clip and swing the sun
visor toward the side window. In this
position, the sun visor can be
extended by sliding out the
extension.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
Instruments and Controls
Sunglasses Holder, Sun Visor
Sunglasses Holder Sun Visor
134
EXTENSION
SUN VISOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle. Do not use
the sun visor extension over the rear
view mirror.
Touseavanitymirroronthebackof
the sun visor, pull up the cover.
The lights beside the mirror come
on only when the parking lights are
on.
A storage compartment is located by
the third seat on the driver’s side. To
open the compartment, pull the lever
and lift the lid. To close, lower the lid
and push it down until it latches.
Instruments and Controls
Vanity Mirror Rear Compartment
Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror, Rear Compartment
135
REAR COMPARTMENT
LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The coin holder is located in the
front beverage holder. To open it,
pull on the bottom edge. Close it
with a firm push.
Open the center pocket by pulling
thehandle.Closeitwithafirmpush.
The light in the pocket comes on
when the instrument panel lights are
on.
Push up the handle to open the
center pocket.
On EX and EX-L models
On U.S. EX-L with optional
Rear Entertainment System
Instruments and Controls
Coin HolderCenter Pocket
Center Pocket, Coin Holder
136
CENTER
POCKET
COIN
HOLDER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To remove the box for cleaning,
push on the lock tab under the seat
bottom and pull the tray out. Do not
try to force the box. You could
damage it.
To use a coat hook, push on the lid.
Close it with a firm push.
Make sure the coat hook is closed
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
A storage box is located under the
front passenger’s seat. To use it, pull
the handle and slide the box out.
On EX and EX-L models
(Except for vehicles with navigation
System)
Storage Box, Coat Hook
Instruments and Controls
Storage Box Coat Hook
137
STORAGE BOX
LOCK TAB
LID
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has two accessory
power sockets. The front accessory
power socket is located under the
center pocket. The rear socket is
behind the third seat on the driver’s
side.
To use an accessory power socket,
pull out on the cover.
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps). To power an accessory, the
ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
When both sockets are being used,
the combined power rating of both
accessories should be 120 watts or
less (10 amps).
The sockets will not power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element.
Instruments and Controls
Accessory Power Sockets
138
FRONT
REAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The light control switch controls the
interior lights: the individual map
lights by the sun visors, the
individual map lights above the
second and third row passengers,
and the cargo area light. This switch
has three positions: OFF, Door
Activated, and ON.
When this switch is in the OFF
position:
None of the lights come on when a
door or the tailgate is opened.
The individual map lights in the
front can be turned on and off with
the switches next to the lights.
The individual map lights in the
second and third rows cannot be
turned on.
The cargo area light can be turned
on with the switch in the light.
The individual map lights in the
front come on when any door or
thetailgateisopened.Whenthe
doors and the tailgate are closed,
eachlightcanbeturnedonandoff
with the switch next to the light.
The individual map lights in the
second and third rows come on
when any door or the tailgate is
opened. When the doors and the
tailgate are closed, each light can
be turned on and off by pushing
on the lens.
When the switch is in the Door
Activated position:
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
Interior Lights
Light Control Switch
139
LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
ON
DOOR
ACTIVATED
POSITION
OFF
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The cargo area light comes on
whenanydoororthetailgateis
opened if the switch in the light is
in the door activated (center)
position. When the doors and the
tailgate are closed, it can be turned
on with the switch in the light.
When the switch is in the ON
position:
All the individual map lights come
onandstayonaslongasthe
switch remains in the ON position.
The cargo area light comes on and
stays on if the switch in the light is
in the door activated (center)
position.
The lights go out about six seconds
after all the doors and the tailgate
are closed.
With the light control switch in the
Door Activated position, all the
individual map lights and the cargo
area light (with the switch in the
center position) come on when you
unlock the door with the remote
transmitter (see page ).
Withanydoororthetailgateleft
open, the lights stay on about three
minutes, then go out.
94
On EX and EX-L models
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
140
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn on the front individual map
lights by pushing the button next to
each light. Push the button again to
turn it off. You can also operate
these lights with the light control
switch (see page ).
Turn on each rear individual map
light by pushing the lens when the
ignition switch is in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Push the lens again to turn it off.
You can also operate these lights
with the light control switch (see
page ).
The cargo area light has a three-
position switch. In the OFF position,
the light does not come on. In the
center position, it comes on when
you open the tailgate. In the ON
position, it stays on continuously.
This light also works with the light
control switch (see page ).
139
139
139
Instruments and Controls
Interior Lights
Individual Map Lights Cargo Area Light
141
FRONT
REAR
OFF
ON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The ignition switch light comes on
when you open the driver’s door, and
stays on several seconds after you
close the door.
Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
Ignition Switch Light
142
Main Menu
Table of Contents
.....................Heating and Cooling . 144
.........What Each Control Does . 144
............How to Use the System . 147
..........To Turn Everything Off . 151
...............Climate Control System . 152
(EX model and EX-L model without
Navigation System)
.......Fully-automatic Operation . 154
.......Semi-automatic Operation . 156
(EX-L model with Navigation
System)
.......Fully-automatic Operation . 160
.......Semi-automatic Operation . 161
Sunlight Sensor/
............Temperature Sensor . 165
...........................Rear A/C Unit . 166
.......................Audio System (LX) . 169
AM/FM/Cassette Stereo
........................Audio System . 169
.................Operating the Radio . 170
.................Adjusting the Sound . 173
............Audio System Lighting . 174
Operating the Cassette
.....................................Player . 174
............Tape Search Functions . 174
Operating the Optional CD
....................Player/Changer . 177
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 180
............Audio System (EX, EX-L) . 181
....AM/FM/CD Audio System . 181
.................Operating the Radio . 182
.................Adjusting the Sound . 186
............Audio System Lighting . 187
....................Radio Frequencies . 187
........................Radio Reception . 187
.........Operating the CD Player . 189
.....Operating the CD Changer . 191
.......Protecting Compact Discs . 192
....CD Player Error Indications . 193
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 194
Operating the Cassette
.....................................Player . 195
............Tape Search Functions . 196
Caring for the Cassette
.....................................Player . 198
...........Remote Audio Controls . 199
.......................Theft Protection . 200
Audio System (Optional on
..................U.S. EX-L model) . 201
AM/FM/CD/DVD Audio
....................................System . 201
.................Operating the Radio . 203
.................Adjusting the Sound . 207
............Audio System Lighting . 208
Operating the Cassette
.....................................Player . 209
.........Operating the CD Player . 212
.....Operating the CD Changer . 214
....CD Player Error Indications . 215
CD Changer Error
.............................Indications . 216
........Rear Entertainment System . 217
............................Security System . 234
...............................Cruise Control . 235
HomeLink Universal
................................Transceiver . 238
Comfort and Convenience Features
Comfort and Convenience Features
143
Main Menu
Proper use of the Heating and
Cooling system can make the
interior dry and comfortable, and
keep the windows clear for the best
visibility.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the fan’s speed, which increases air
flow.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the air flow.
This button turns the air condi-
tioning ON and OFF. The indicator
above the button lights when the
A/C is on.
This button controls the source of
the air going into the system. When
the indicator above this button is lit,
air from the vehicle’s interior is sent
through the system again (Recircula-
tion mode). When the indicator is off,
air is brought in from outside the
vehicle (Fresh Air mode).
With this dial, you can adjust the
rear A/C unit heating, cooling, and
air flow (see page ).
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).
166
87
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
What Each Control Does
Fan Control Dial
Temperature Control Dials
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Recirculation Button Rear Window Defogger Button
Rear A/C Control Dial
On LX model
144
MODE BUTTONS TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
REAR A/C
CONTROL DIAL
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Use the MODE buttons to select the
vents the air flows from. Some air
will flow from the dashboard corner
vents in all modes.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Air flow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Air flow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to Fresh Air
mode.
When you select or ,
the system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C.
In these two modes, the A/C stays
on.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
Mode Buttons
145
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The vents in the corners of the
dashboard can be opened and closed
with the dials next to them.
You can adjust the direction of the
air coming from the dashboard vents
by moving the tab in the center of
each vent up-and-down and side-to-
side.
There are four vents in the ceiling
(see page ).168
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
Vent Controls
146
CENTER VENTS
CORNER VENT REAR CEILING VENT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
This section covers how to set up the
system controls for ventilation,
heating, cooling, dehumidifying, and
defrosting.
The engine must be running for the
heater and air conditioning to
generate hot and cold air. The heater
uses engine coolant to warm the air.
If the engine is cold, it will be several
minutes before you feel warm air
coming from the system.
The air conditioning does not rely on
engine temperature.
It is best to leave the system in Fresh
Air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in Recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to Recirculation mode when
you are driving through smoky or
dusty conditions, then switch back to
Fresh Air mode when the condition
clears.
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep
these clear of leaves and other
debris.
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear side
panels.
Turn the temperature control dial
all the way to the left.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
1.
2.
3.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
How to Use the System
Ventilation
147
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
MODE BUTTONS
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the interior has cooled down
to a more comfortable temperature,
close the windows and set the
controls as described for normal
cooling.
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
) when driving in stop-and-go
traffic or climbing a long, steep hill.
If it moves near the red zone, turn
off the A/C until the gauge reads
normally.
If the interior is very warm from
beingparkedinthesun,youcancool
it down more rapidly by setting up
the controls this way:
Start the engine.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. Make sure the tempera-
ture control dial is turned all the
way to the left.
Set the fan to maximum speed.
Open the windows partially. Select
and Fresh Air mode.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The light above the button
comesonwhenafanspeedis
selected.
Make sure the temperature
control dial is all the way to the left.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
Recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
79
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
To Cool with A/C
148
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
MODE BUTTONS
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To warm the interior:
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry.
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Turn on the air conditioning.
Select and Fresh Air mode.
Adjust the temperature control
dial so the mixture of heated and
cooled air feels comfortable.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Select .
When you select , the
system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C.
Adjust the temperature control
dial so the air flow from the
defroster vents feels warm.
Turn on the rear window defogger
to help clear the rear window.
When you switch to another mode
from , the A/C stays on.
PresstheA/Cbuttontoturnitoff.
Start the engine.
Select .
When you select , the
system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONTINUED
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
To Heat To Heat and Dehumidif y with Air
Conditioning
To Defog and Defrost
149
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To remove exterior frost or ice from
the windshield and side windows
after the vehicle has been sitting out
in cold weather:
Start the engine.
Select .
When you select , the
system automatically switches to
Fresh Air mode and turns on the
A/C.
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum.
To rapidly remove exterior frost or
ice from the windshield (on very cold
days), first select the Recirculation
mode. Once the windshield is clear,
select the Fresh Air mode to avoid
fogging the windows.
1.
2.
3.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Heating and Cooling
150
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
MODE BUTTONS
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
For safety, make sure you have a
clear view through all the windows
before driving away.
These settings direct all the air flow
to the defroster vents at the base of
the windshield and the side window
defroster vents. The air flow will get
warmer and clear the windows faster
as the engine warms up. You can
close the corner vents with the dial
beside each vent. This will send
more warm air to the windshield
defroster vents.
To shut off the system temporarily,
turn the fan speed and temperature
control dials all the way to the left.
You should shut the system
completely off only for the first few
minutes of driving in cold weather,
until the engine coolant warms up
enough to operate the heater. Keep
the fan on at all other times so stale
air does not build up in the interior.
Heating and Cooling
Comfort and Convenience Features
To Turn Everything Off
151
Main Menu
Table of Contents
For the climate control system to
provide heating and cooling, the
engine must be running.
The automatic climate control
system in your Honda picks the
proper combination of air condi-
tioning, heating, and ventilation to
maintain the interior temperature
you select. The system also adjusts
the fan speed and air flow levels.
The direction of air flow from the
vents in the center and each corner
of the dashboard is adjustable.
Move the tab in the center of each
vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
Your vehicle also has a rear A/C unit
that allows the rear passengers to
adjust the heating, cooling, and air
flow (see page ).
The corner vents can be opened and
closed with the dials next to them.
The climate control system draws air
through the exterior vents at the
bottom of the windshield. Keep
these vents clear of leaves and other
debris.
There are four vents in the ceiling
(see page ).
166
168
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
On EX and EX-L models
152
CENTER VENTS CORNER VENT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
153
REAR CEILING VENT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature from its current level to
the set temperature.
To put the Automatic Climate
Control in fully-automatic mode,
press the AUTO button and set the
fan control dial to AUTO, then set
the desired temperature by turning
the temperature control dial. You will
see FULL AUTO in the system’s
display. The light above the
buttonalsoshowsyouwhich
mode, Recirculation or Fresh Air, is
selected.
EX model and EX-L model without
Navigation System
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Fully-automatic Operation
154
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
FULL AUTO
DISPLAY
FAN CONTROL DIAL
AUTO BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upper
limit (90°F/32°C), the system runs
at full cooling or heating only. It does
not regulate the interior temperature.
When the temperature is set
between the lower and upper limits,
the system regulates the interior
temperature to the set value.
Pressing the OFF button shuts the
climate control system completely
off. Keep the system completely off
only for short periods. To keep stale
air and mustiness from collecting,
you should have the fan running at
all times.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
155
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
FULL AUTO
DISPLAY
FAN CONTROL DIAL
OFF BUTTON
AUTO BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can manually select various
functions of the Climate Control
system when it is in FULL AUTO.
All other features remain auto-
matically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
FULL to go out.
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioningonandoff.Youwillsee
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the sys-
tem cannot regulate the inside tem-
perature if you set the dial below the
outside temperature. With the A/C
on, use the temperature control dial
to adjust the temperature of the air
flow to a comfortable setting.
This button controls the source of
the air going into the system. When
the indicator above this button is lit,
air from the vehicle’s interior is sent
through the system again (Recircula-
tion mode). When the indicator is off,
air is brought in from outside the
vehicle (Fresh Air mode).
You can, for example, manually put
the system in recirculation mode
when driving through an area of
smoke or fumes.
Semi-automatic Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Recirculation Button
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
156
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
AIR CONDITIONING
BUTTON
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can manually select the fan
speedbyturningthefancontroldial.
When you turn the dial clockwise,
the fan is taken out of automatic
mode and starts to run at its lowest
speed. Turning the dial fully
clockwise increases the fan’s speed,
which increases air flow.
With this dial, you can adjust the
rear A/C unit heating, cooling, and
air flow (see page ).
Use the MODE button to select the
vents the air flows from. Some air
will flow from the dashboard corner
vents in all modes. Each time you
press the MODE button, the display
shows the mode selected. Press the
button four times to see all the
modes.
166
CONTINUED
Fan Control Dial
Rear A/C Control Dial
Mode Button
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
157
MODE BUTTON FAN CONTROL DIAL
REAR A/C CONTROL DIAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The main air flow is divided
between the floor vents and de-
froster vents at the base of the wind-
shield.
The main air flow is divided
between the dashboard vents and
the floor vents.
The main air flow comes
from the floor vents.
The main air flow comes
from the dashboard vents.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
158
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The button directs the main
air flow to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
MODE selection you may have made.
When you select , the A/C
turns on automatically and the
system selects Fresh Air mode. If
thefancontroldialisinAUTO,the
fan speed increases automatically. If
it is not in AUTO, manually increase
the fan speed or set the dial to
AUTO. You can increase air flow to
thewindshieldbyclosingtheside
vents in the dashboard.
When you turn off by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).87
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Rear Window Defogger Button
159
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
To put the Automatic Climate
Control in fully-automatic mode,
press the AUTO button. Then set
the desired temperature by pressing
either side of the TEMP button:
to raise the temperature above the
displayed value, or to lower the
temperature.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature from its current level to
the set temperature.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upper
limit (90°F/32°C), the system runs
at full cooling or heating only. It does
not regulate the interior temperature.
When the temperature is set
between the lower and upper limits,
the system regulates the interior
temperature to the set value.
In cold weather, the fan will not
come on automatically until the
vehicle has been driven for a short
time and the heater starts to develop
warm air.
Pressing the OFF button shuts the
climate control system completely
off. Keep the system completely off
only for short periods. To keep stale
air and mustiness from collecting,
you should have the fan running at
all times.
EX-L model with Navigation System
Climate Control System
Fully-automatic Operation
Comfort and Convenience Features
160
TEMPERATURE BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
AUTO BUTTON
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can manually select various
functions of the Climate Control
system when it is in FULL AUTO.
All other features remain auto-
matically controlled. Some of these
functions appear in the Navigation
System display. Press the A/C
button next to the display to show
these functions.
Pressing ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ in the
display turns the air conditioning on
andoff.YouwillseeA/CONorA/C
OFF activated in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set it below the
outside temperature. With the A/C
on, use the temperature buttons to
adjust the temperature of the air
flow to a comfortable setting.
CONTINUED
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Semi-automatic Operation
Air Conditioning (A/C) Buttons
161
TEMPERATURE BUTTONS
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This button controls the source of
the air going into the system. When
the indicator above this button is lit,
air from the vehicle’s interior is sent
through the system again (Recircula-
tion mode). When the indicator is off,
air is brought in from outside the
vehicle (Fresh Air mode).
You can, for example, manually put
the system in recirculation mode
when driving through an area of
smoke or fumes.
You can manually select the fan
speed by pressing any of the fan
control icons.
Use the MODE icons to select the
vents the air flows from. Some air
will flow from the dashboard corner
vents and the side vents in all modes.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Recirculation Button
Fan Control Icons
Mode Icons
162
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
MODE ICONS
FAN CONTROL ICONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The main air flow is divided
between the floor vents and de-
froster vents at the base of the wind-
shield.
The main air flow comes
from the floor vents.
The main air flow is divided
between the dashboard vents and
the floor vents.
The main air flow comes
from the dashboard vents.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
163
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The button directs the main
air flow to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
MODE selection you may have made.
When you turn off by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
When you select , the A/C
turns on automatically and the
system selects Fresh Air mode. For
faster defrosting, manually set the
fanspeedtohigh.Youcanalso
increase air flow to the windshield by
closing the side vents in the
dashboard.
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page ).87
Rear Window Defogger Button
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
164
DEFROST BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Theclimatecontrolsystemhastwo
sensors. A sunlight sensor is located
in the top of the dashboard and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
Sensor
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
165
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has two controls for the
rear A/C unit. The rear A/C control
dial is located on the climate control
panel, and the rear A/C passenger
control panel is on the ceiling behind
the driver’s seat.
You can adjust the heating, cooling,
and air flow of the rear A/C unit with
these control dials. The rear
passengers can also adjust the
direction and the amount of air flow
with the rear ceiling vents.
Rear A/C Unit
Comfort and Convenience Features
Climate Control System
166
REAR CEILING VENT
REAR A/C PASSENGER
CONTROL PANEL
REAR A/C
CONTROL DIAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When this dial is in the OFF position,
no air flows to the rear vents, and the
rear control panel is turned off.
Turning the dial counterclockwise
from the OFF position increases the
rear fan speed and air flow. The air
flows from the rear ceiling vents.
When this dial is in the RR position,
the rear A/C passenger control
panel is enabled. A second row
passenger can then adjust the fan
speed and air flow.
Turning the dial clockwise from the
RR position turns off the rear A/C
passenger control panel, and
increases the rear fan speed. The air
flows from the rear floor vents.
When the rear A/C control dial on
the front panel is in the RR position,
the passenger in the second row can
use the rear A/C passenger control
panel to adjust the fan speed and air
flow.
The fan speed control dial changes
the speed of the rear fan; turn it
clockwise to increase fan speed and
air flow.
CONTINUED
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Rear A/C Control Dial Rear A/C Passenger Control Panel
167
REAR A/C CONTROL DIAL
FAN SPEED
CONTROL DIAL
HEATING/COOLING/
AIR FLOW
CONTROL DIAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The heating/cooling/air flow control
dial selects the temperature and
level of the air flow.
When the dial is in the
position, heated air flows
from the rear floor vents.
When the dial is in the
position cooled air flows
from the rear ceiling vents. Cooled
air can be selected when the A/C
switch on the front control panel is
turned on.
The direction and quantity of air flow
from each rear ceiling vent is
adjustable.
To adjust the direction of the air
coming from a rear ceiling vent,
move the tab in the center of each
vent back-and-forth, and rotate the
vent with the tab. The lever next to
each vent can be opened and closed
to regulate the amount of air flow.
Climate Control System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Rear Ceiling Vents
168
TAB
LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The cassette system features Dolby
noise reduction, automatic sensing of
chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and
autoreverse for continuous play.
2
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
On LX model
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AM/FM/Cassette Stereo Audio
System
169
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
▼
▲
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pushing the PWR/
VOL knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
Adjust the volume by turning the
PWR/VOL knob.
You can use any of four methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or the
Preset buttons.
Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the upper part ( ) to tune
to a higher frequency, or the lower
part ( ) to tune to a lower
frequency. The frequency numbers
will start to change rapidly. Release
the bar when the display reaches the
desired frequency. To change the
frequency in small increments, press
and release the TUNE bar quickly.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, push
the SEEK switch up or down, then
release it. Depending on which way
you push the switch, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the Radio
TUNE
SEEK
170
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
CONTINUED
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. SCN shows in the
display. The system will scan up the
band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds a strong signal,
it will stop and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
SCAN
171
AM/FM
BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON SCN INDICATOR
PWR/VOL
KNOB
SEEK SWITCH TUNE BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
To store a frequency:
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
Use the TUNE or SEEK function
to tune the radio to a desired
station.
Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
Preset button to tune to it.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Preset
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
172
AM/FM BUTTON
SEEK SWITCH
PRESET
BUTTONS
TUNE BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
These two
controls adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
The Balance control adjusts the side-
to-side strength, while the Fader
control adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
To adjust the fader, push on the
BASS/FADER control knob to get it
to pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,
and adjust the front-to-back sound to
your liking. Push the knob back in
when you are done so you cannot
change the setting by accidentally
bumping it.
To adjust the balance, push on the
TREBLE/BALANCE control knob
to get it to pop out. Pull it out slightly
farther, and adjust the side-to-side
sound to your liking. Push the knob
back in when you are done so you
cannot change the setting by
accidentally bumping it.
Use these controls
to adjust the tone to your liking.
To adjust the Bass level, push on the
BASS/FADER control knob to get it
to pop out. Without pulling it out
farther, turn the knob to adjust the
bass level. Push the knob back in
when you are done so you cannot
change the setting by accidentally
bumping it.
For information, see page .
To adjust the Treble level, push on
the TREBLE/BALANCE control
knob to get it to pop out. Without
pulling it out farther, turn the knob
to adjust the treble level. Push the
knob back in when you are done so
you cannot change the setting by
accidentally bumping it. 187
Adjusting the Sound
Balance/Fader
Treble/Bass
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
173
BASS/FADER
CONTROL
TREBLE/BALANCE
CONTROL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲−
−
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Turn the audio system ON. Make
sure the tape opening on the cassette
is facing to the right, then insert the
cassette most of the way into the slot.
The system will pull it in the rest of
the way, and begin to play.
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The indicates
thesideyouinsertedfacingupward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
button.
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
Fast Forward and Re-
wind move the tape rapidly. To re-
wind the tape, push the REW button.
You will see REW in the display. To
fast forward the tape, push the FF
button. You will see FF displayed.
Press the PLAY button to take the
system out of rewind or fast forward.
If the system reaches the end of the
tape while in fast forward or rewind,
it automatically stops that function,
reverses direction, and begins to play.
The Skip Function allows
youtofindthebeginningofasong
or passage. To find the beginning of
the song or passage currently
playing, push the SKIP switch down.
You will see REW flashing in the
display as the tape rewinds. To find
the beginning of the next song, push
the SKIP switch up. You will see FF
flashing in the display as the tape
fast forwards. When the system
finds the beginning of a song or
passage, it goes back to PLAY mode.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. If the tape was
not recorded with Dolby noise reduc-
tion, turn it off by pressing the
button.83
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System Lighting
Operating the Cassette Player
Tape Search Functions
FF/REW
SKIP
174
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
CONTINUED
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
REPEAT
175
EJECT BUTTON CASSETTE SLOT TAPE DIRECTION
INDICATOR
FF BUTTONREW BUTTONRPT BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
PLAY BUTTON
PROG BUTTON
DOLBY BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
Damaged cassettes can jam inside
the drive or cause other problems.
See page for information on
cassette care and protection.
198
Caring for Cassettes
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
176
EJECT BUTTON CASSETTE SLOT TAPE DIRECTION
INDICATOR
FF BUTTONREW BUTTONRPT BUTTON
SKIP BUTTON
DOLBY BUTTON
PROG BUTTON
PLAY BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A Compact Disc changer is available
from your dealer. It holds up to six
discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate the CD changer with the
same controls used for the radio and
cassette player.
Using the instructions that came
with the changer, load the desired
CDs in the magazine, and load the
magazine in the changer. Play only
standard round discs. Odd-shaped
CDs may jam in the drive or cause
other problems.
Your dealer also has an accessory in-
dash single CD player available that
is operated by the radio controls. To
operate this unit, use the instructions
(except for those relating to multiple
discs) in this section.
CONTINUED
Operating the Optional CD
Player/Changer
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
177
AM/FM BUTTON
TAPE/CD BUTTON
RANDOM INDICATOR
REPEAT INDICATOR
PRESET BUTTONS
SKIP SWITCH
RPT BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
When you activate the
Repeat feature by pressing the RPT
button, the system continuously
replays the current track. You will
see RPT in the display as a reminder.
Press the RPT button again to turn it
off.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on a
CD in random order, rather than in
the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
andholdtheRPTbuttonuntilyou
seeRDMinthedisplay.Thesystem
will then select and play tracks
randomly on the current disc. When
all tracks on that disc have been
played, the next disc is loaded and
played randomly. This continues
until you deactivate Random Play by
pressing RPT again.
If you push and hold the SKIP switch,
you will hear a beep and the system
will continue to move across tracks.
Release the switch when you think it
has reached the desired place on the
disc.
You can use the SKIP switch to
select tracks within a disc. If you
push and release the SKIP switch,
the system will move to the
beginning of a track. Push the switch
up to move to the beginning of the
next track, and push the switch
down to move to the beginning of
the current track.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate preset button (1 6). If
you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will, after
finding that slot empty, try to load
the CD in the next slot. This
continues until it finds a CD to load
and play.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
To operate the CD changer or player,
the ignition must be in ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) and the audio system
must be on.
Press the CD button until ‘‘CD’’
appears in the display. The system
will start to play the first track of the
first disc in the magazine. Play only
standard round discs.
When that disc ends, the next disc in
the magazine is loaded and played.
After the last disc finishes, the
system returns to disc 1.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
REPEAT
RANDOM PLAY
178
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the system is in Repeat mode, you
must turn it off by pressing RPT
before you can select Random Play.
Then press the button again until
you see RDM displayed.
To take the system out of CD mode,
press the AM/FM button or insert a
cassette in the player. If a tape is
already in the cassette player, press
the TAPE button. When you return
to CD mode, play will continue at the
same disc and track.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or the ignition switch, play will
continue at the same disc and track
when you turn it back on.
192
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Protecting Compact Discs
179
AM/FM BUTTON
TAPE/CD BUTTON
RANDOM INDICATOR
REPEAT INDICATOR
PRESET BUTTONS
SKIP SWITCH
RPT BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Indication SolutionCause
If the code disappears within a few seconds,
unit is OK.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Press the magazine eject button. If the maga-
zine does not eject, consult your Honda dealer.
Press the magazine eject button, and insert an
empty magazine.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
See your Honda dealer.
Insert CD magazine.
Insert a CD in the magazine.
Disc-changer
malfunction.
CD magazine ejection
impossible.
Disc is in changer
mechanism.
High Temperature
Misconnection or
disconnection of CD
changer.
No CD magazine in the
CD changer.
No CD in magazine.
CD Changer Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
180
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The anti-theft feature will disable the
system if it is disconnected from the
vehicle’s battery. To get the system
working again, you must enter a
code number (see page ).200
On EX and EX-L models
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AM/FM/CD Audio System
181
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pushing the PWR/
VOL knob. Adjust the volume by
turning the same knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
Use the TUNE bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Press the side of the bar to tune
to a higher frequency, and the
side to tune to a lower
frequency. The frequency numbers
will start to change rapidly. Release
the bar when the display reaches the
desired frequency. To change the
frequency in small increments, press
and release the TUNE bar quickly.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
SELECT, and the preset buttons.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
theSEEKbaroneitherthe or
side, then release it.
Depending on which side you press,
the system scans upward or down-
ward from the current frequency. It
stops when it finds a station with a
strong signal.
Operating the Radio TUNE SEEK
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
182
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
CONTINUED
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. You will see SCAN in
the display. The system will scan up
the band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds one, it will stop
and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
SCAN
Preset
183
PWR/VOL
KNOB
AM/FM BUTTON STEREO INDICATOR
TUNE BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
SCAN
BUTTON
SEEK BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To store a frequency:
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
Preset button to tune to it.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
184
AM/FM BUTTON
TUNE BAR
SEEK BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations. If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset buttons as described
previously.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AUTO SELECT
185
TUNE BAR SEEK BAR
AUTO SELECT INDICATOR SCAN BUTTON
A. SEL BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
These two
controls adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
The Balance control adjusts the side-
to-side strength, while the Fader
control adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
To adjust the fader, push on the
BASS/FADER control knob to get it
to pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,
and adjust the front-to-back sound to
your liking. Push the knob back in
when you are done so you cannot
change the setting by accidentally
bumping it.
To adjust the balance, push on the
TREBLE/BALANCE control knob
to get it to pop out. Pull it out slightly
farther, and adjust the side-to-side
sound to your liking. Push the knob
back in when you are done so you
cannot change the setting by
accidentally bumping it.
Use these controls
to adjust the tone to your liking.
To adjust the Treble level, push on
the TREBLE/BALANCE control
knob to get it to pop out. Without
pulling it out farther, turn the knob
to adjust the treble level. Push the
knob back in when you are done so
you cannot change the setting by
accidentally bumping it.
To adjust the Bass level, push on the
BASS/FADER control knob to get it
to pop out. Without pulling it out
farther, turn the knob to adjust the
bass level. Push the knob back in
when you are done so you cannot
change the setting by accidentally
bumping it.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
Adjusting the Sound
Balance/Fader
Treble/Bass
186
BASS/FADER
CONTROL
TREBLE/BALANCE
CONTROL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Your Honda’s radio can receive the
complete AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band:
530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band:
87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least ten
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).
Stations on the FM band are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
How well your Honda’s radio
receives stations is dependent on
many factors, such as the distance
from the station’s transmitter,
nearby large objects, and atmos-
pheric conditions.
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
83
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System Lighting
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
187
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
188
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio.
With the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insert
the disc into the CD slot. Push the
disc in halfway, the drive will pull it
in the rest of the way and begin to
play. The number of the track that is
playing is shown in the display.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring. In all
cases, play only standard round discs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
driveorcauseotherproblems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
CONTINUED
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the CD Player
189
AM/FM BUTTON CD SLOT TUNE BAR
EJECT BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
A.SEL/RDM BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
CD BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
You can use the TUNE and SEEK/
SKIP bars while a disc is playing to
select passages and change tracks.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdtheTUNEbar.Pressthe
side to move forward. You will
seeCUEinthedisplay.Pressthe
side to move backward. You
will see REW displayed. Release the
bar when the system reaches the
point you want.
Each time you press and release the
side of the SEEK/SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
the sidetoskipbackwardtothe
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to skip to the beginning of
the previous track.
To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current track. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on
the CD in random order, rather than
in the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
and release the A. SEL/RDM button.
You will see RDM in the display. The
system will then select and play
tracks randomly. This continues
until you deactivate Random Play by
pressing A. SEL/RDM again.
If the system is in Repeat mode, you
must turn it off by pressing the RPT
button before selecting Random Play.
When the system reaches the end of
the disc, it will return to the begin-
ning and play the disc again.
You can switch to the radio while a
CD is playing by pressing the AM/
FM button. Press the CD button to
return to playing the CD. The CD
will begin playing where it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
Press the eject button to remove the
disc from the drive.
If you eject the disc, but do not
remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 15 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
REPEAT
RANDOM PLAY
190
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
A Compact Disc changer is available
foryourvehicle.Itholdsuptosix
discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the in-dash
CD player.
Load the desired CDs in the
magazine and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
Play only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
Ifyouejectthediscinthein-dash
CD while it is playing, the system
will automatically switch to the CD
changer and begin play where it left
off. If there are no CDs in the
changer, the display will flash. You
will have to select another mode
(AM or FM) with the button.
When you switch back to CD mode,
the system selects the same unit (in-
dash or changer) that was playing
when you switched out of CD mode.
To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
RANDOM functions, refer to the in-
dash player operating instructions.
If you load a CD in the in-dash player
while the changer is playing a CD,
the system will stop the changer and
begin playing the in-dash CD. To
select the changer again, press the
CD button. Play will begin where it
left off. Use the CD button to switch
between the player and the changer.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate preset button (1 6). If
you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will, after
finding that slot empty, try to load
the CD in the next slot. This
continues until it finds a CD to load
and play.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the CD Changer
(Optional)
191
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A new CD may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the re-
cording surface of the disc, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the magazine.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These and contamination from
fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens
can cause the CD to not play
properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
Protecting Compact Discs
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
192
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
player,findthecauseinthechartto
the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Indication Cause Solution
System Error
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
Communication Error
LSI Error
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in CD
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Honda dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Consult your Honda dealer.
CD Player Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
193
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indication Solution
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the optional
CD changer, find the cause in the
chart to the right. If you cannot clear
the error indication, take the vehicle
to your Honda dealer.
Cause
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Press the magazine eject button and pull out
the magazine, check for error indication. Insert
the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
See your Honda dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Insert CD magazine.
Insert CD.
System Error
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
Communication Error
LSI Error
High Temperature
No CD magazine in the
CD changer.
No CD in the CD
magazine.
CD Changer Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
194
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
CONTINUED
The cassette system features Dolby
noise reduction, automatic sensing of
chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and
autoreverse for continuous play.
Make sure the tape opening on the
cassette is facing to the right, then
insert the cassette most of the way
into the slot. The system will pull it
in the rest of the way, and begin to
play.
2
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the Cassette Player
(Optional)
195
PWR/VOL
KNOB
AM/FM
BUTTON
CD
BUTTON
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
TUNE BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
REPEAT BUTTON
NR
BUTTON
PROG
BUTTON
PLAY
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
−
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The indicates
thesideyouinsertedfacingupward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
button.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. If the tape was
not recorded with Dolby noise
reduction, turn it off by pressing the
NR button.
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the cassette player will be in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the PLAY button.
To switch to the radio or CD player
while a tape is playing, press the
AM/FM, or CD button. To change
back to the cassette player, push the
CD button.
Fast Forward and
Rewind move the tape rapidly. Press
and release the side of the
TUNE bar to fast forward the tape,
or the side to rewind. You
will see FF or REW flashing in the
display. To stop fast forward or
rewind, press either side of the
TUNE bar or the PLAY button. If the
system reaches the end of the tape
while in fast forward or rewind, it
automatically stops that function,
reverses direction, and begins to play.
Noise reduction remains off until you
turn it on by pressing the button
again.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button on the cassette player.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Tape Search Functions
FF/REW
196
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
The Skip function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To activate SKIP, press
the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the
side to advance to the
beginning of the next song or
passage, or the side to return to
the beginning of the current song or
passage. FF or REW will flash in the
display as the tape moves. When the
system reaches the beginning of the
next song or passage (FF), or the
beginning of the current one (REW),
it goes back to PLAY mode.
The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
SKIP REPEAT
197
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The cassette player picks up dirt and
oxides from the tape. This contami-
nation builds up over time and
causes the sound quality to degrade.
To prevent this, you should clean the
player after every 30 hours of use.
Your dealer has a cleaning kit
available.
If you do not clean the cassette
player regularly, it may eventually
become impossible to remove the
contamination with a normal
cleaning kit.
Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.
Cassettes longer than that use
thinner tape that may break or jam
the drive.
Look at the cassette before you
insert it. If the tape is loose, tighten
it by turning a hub with a pencil or
your finger.
If you see the error indication
‘‘ ’’ (LX model)/‘‘ ’’
(EX and EX-L models)/‘‘ ’’
(optional on EX-L model) on the
display, press the EJECT button and
remove the cassette from the unit.
Make sure the tape is not damaged.
If the cassette will not eject or the
error indication stays on after the
cassette ejects, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
If a problem develops in the connec-
tion between the cassette player and
the radio, you will see ‘‘ ’’ in
the display. Take the vehicle to your
Honda dealer.
If the label is peeling off, remove it
from the cassette or it could cause
the cassette to jam in the player.
Never try to insert a warped or
damaged cassette in the player.
When they are not in use, store
cassettes in their cases to protect
them from dust and moisture. Never
place cassettes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a cassette is
exposed to extreme heat or cold, let
it reach a moderate temperature
before inserting it in the player.
Never try to insert foreign objects
into the cassette player.
On LX model
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Caring for the Cassette Player
198
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
The top and bottom buttons adjust
thevolumeup( )ordown( ).
Press the proper button and hold it
until the desired volume is reached,
then release it.
Two controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
The AUDIO/CH button has three
functions, depending on whether you
are listening to the radio, or playing a
cassette or CD.
If you are playing a cassette, use the
AUDIO/CH button to advance to the
next selection. You will see ‘‘FF’’
blinking in the display when you
press the AUDIO/CH button. The
system fast forwards until it senses a
silent period, then goes back to
PLAY.
IfyouareplayingaCD,thesystem
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you push the
AUDIO/CH button. You will see the
disc and track number in the display.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the AUDIO/CH button to change
stations. Each time you press this
button, the system advances to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. You will see the
number of the selected Preset button
in the display. To change bands,
press the AM/FM button on the
audio system’s front panel.
On EX and EX-L models
Remote Audio Controls
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
199
AUDIO/CH
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You will have to store your favorite
stations in the Preset buttons after
the system begins working. Your
original settings were lost when
power was disconnected.
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, the user
must enter a specific five-digit code
in the Preset buttons. Because there
are hundreds of number
combinations possible from five
digits, making the system work
without knowing the exact code is
nearly impossible.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system’s code
number and serial number. It is best
tostorethiscardinasafeplaceat
home. In addition, you should write
the audio system’s serial number in
this Owner’s Manual. If you should
happen to lose the card, you must
obtain the code number from your
Honda dealer. To do this, you will
need the system’s serial number.
If your vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected or goes dead, or the radio
fuse is removed, the audio system
will disable itself. If this happens,
youwillsee‘‘ ’’inthe
frequencydisplaythenexttimeyou
turn on the system. Use the Preset
buttons to enter the five-digit code. If
it is entered correctly, the radio will
start playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over or try to
correct your mistake. Complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for
one hour before trying again.
On EX and EX-L models
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
Theft Protection
200
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
CONTINUED
Your Honda’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The anti-theft feature will disable the
system if it is disconnected from the
vehicle’s battery. To get the system
working again, you must enter a
code number (see page ).
The cassette system features Dolby
noise reduction, automatic sensing of
chromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, and
autoreverse for continuous play.
200
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
2
Optional on U.S. EX-L model
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AM/FM/Cassette/CD/DVD
Audio system
201
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This system also has a rear
entertainment system that allows the
rear passengers to listen through
wireless headhones to different
programming than the front seat
occupants. A built-in DVD player
allows the rear passengers to watch
DVDs or video CDs. To operate this
part of the system, refer to Rear
Entertainment System on page .
The front control panel has two
displays. The left display shows the
information for the front part of the
system.
When the rear system is on, the
right display shows the information
for the rear part of the system.
217
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
202
FRONT SYSTEM DISPLAY REAR SYSTEM DISPLAY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pushing the PWR/
VOL knob. Adjust the volume by
turning the same knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction on
AM is not available.
CONTINUED
Operating the Radio
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
203
SCAN
INDICATOR
STEREO
INDICATOR
TUNE KNOB
SEEK BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
SCAN
BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
AM/FM
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−−＋
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the TUNE knob to the right to
tune to a higher frequency, or to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
Turn the knob right or left until the
display reaches the desired
frequency.
The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
theSEEKbaror,then
release it. Depending on which part
of the SEEK bar you press, the
system scans upward or downward
from the current frequency. It stops
when it finds a station with a strong
signal.
To store a frequency:
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
button.
Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
Preset button to tune to it. The
preset frequencies will be lost if your
vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTO
SELECT, and the preset buttons.
The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. You will see SCAN in
the display. The system will scan up
the band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds one, it will stop
and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
UsetheTUNE,SEEK,orSCAN
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
TUNE
SEEK
SCAN
Preset
204
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
CONTINUED
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AUTO SELECT
205
A.SEL
INDICATOR
AM/FM
BUTTON
A.SEL
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset buttons as described
previously.
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset pre-
viously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
206
A.SEL
INDICATOR
AM/FM
BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
SCAN
BUTTON
A.SEL
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
SEEK BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
CONTINUED
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the TUNE knob. The mode changes
fromBAStoTREtoFADtoBAL,
and then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
TUNE knob.
Use these modes to
adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE
knob. Adjust the selected mode by
turning the TUNE knob. The
displayed number shows you the
current setting.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
When the adjustment level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Adjusting the Sound
Treble/Bass
Balance/Fader
207
ADJUSTMENT LEVEL
TUNE KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the
TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or
Fader to your liking by turning the
TUNE knob.
The displayed number shows you
the current setting.
When the adjustment level reaches
the center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
MODE knob.
For information, see page .You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
187
83
Comfort and Convenience Features
Audio System
Audio System Lighting Radio Frequencies and Reception
208
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
CONTINUED
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
Make sure the tape opening on the
cassette is facing to the right, then
insert the cassette most of the way
into the slot. The system will pull it
in the rest of the way, and begin to
play.
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The indicates
thesideyouinsertedfacingupward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
( ) button.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. The indi-
cator will light in the display. If the
tape was not recorded with Dolby
noise reduction, turn it off by
pressing the button.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the Cassette Player
209
DOLBY
INDICATOR
TAPE DIRECTION
INDICATOR
CASSETTE
SLOT
TAPE EJECT
BUTTON
TAPE
BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
PROG BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Noise reduction remains off until you
turn it on by pressing the button
again.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button.
You can remove the cassette with
the ignition switch in any position,
even if the audio system is turned off.
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the tape will begin playing
where it left off.
To switch to the radio, CD player, or
CD changer, press the AM/FM or
CD/CHG button. To change back to
the cassette player, press the TAPE
button.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
210
PWR/VOL
KNOB
AM/FM
BUTTON
CASSETTE SLOT
TAPE
EJECT
BUTTON
SEEK BARFF BUTTON
PLAY/PROG BUTTON
REW
BUTTON
RPT
BUTTON
CD/CHG BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
＋
−＋
−
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
Fast Forward and
Rewind move the tape rapidly. To
rewind the tape, push the
button. You will see REW in
the display. To fast forward the tape,
push the button. You will see
FF displayed. Press the ,
or PLAY/PROG button to
take the system out of rewind or fast
forward. When the system reaches
the end of the tape, it reverses
direction and begins to play.
The Skip function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To skip to the beginning
of a song or passage currently
playing, push the side of the SKIP
bar. You will see REW flashing in the
display as the tape rewinds. To skip
to the beginning of the next song,
push the side of the SKIP bar.
You will see FF flashing in the
display as the tape fast forwards.
When the system finds the
beginning of a song or passage, it
goes back to PLAY.
To stop the SKIP function before it
finds the beginning of a song or
passage, press either side of the
SKIP bar ( or ).
The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
Pressing the or
button, or either side of the
SKIP bar, also turns off REPEAT.
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
Damaged cassettes can jam inside
the drive or cause other problems.
See page for information on
cassette care and protection.
198
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Tape Search Functions
FF/REW
SKIP
REPEAT
Caring for the Cassette Player
211
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You operate the CD player with the
same controls used for the radio.
With the ignition switch in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insert
the disc into the CD slot. Push the
disc in halfway, the drive will pull it
in the rest of the way and begin to
play. The number of the track that is
playing is shown in the display.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring. Play
only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the CD Player
212
PWR/VOL
KNOB
CD SLOT CD EJECT
BUTTON
SKIP BAR
CD BUTTON
RDM
BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
＋
−
＋
−
When the system reaches the end of
the disc, it will return to the begin-
ning and play the disc again.
You can switch to the radio while a
CD is playing by pressing the AM/
FM button. Press the CD button to
return to playing the CD. The CD
will begin playing where it left off.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
Press the eject button to remove the
disc from the drive.
If you eject the disc, but do not
remove it from the slot, the system
will automatically reload the disc
after 15 seconds and put the CD
player in pause mode. To begin
playing the disc, press the CD button.
You can use the SEEK/SKIP bar
while a disc is playing to select
passages and change tracks.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdtheSEEK/SKIPbar.Press
the side to move forward. You
will see CUE in the display. Press the
side to move backward. You
will see REW displayed. Release the
bar when the system reaches the
point you want.
Each time you press and release the
side of the SEEK/SKIP bar,
the system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track. Press
and release the side to skip
backward to the beginning of the
current track. Press it again to skip
to the beginning of the previous
track.
To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. The system continuously
replays the current track. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks on
the CD in random order, rather than
in the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate Random Play, press
and release the A. SEL/RDM button.
You will see RDM in the display. The
system will then select and play
tracks randomly. This continues
until you deactivate Random Play by
pressing A. SEL/RDM again.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
REPEAT
RANDOM PLAY
213
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
A Compact Disc changer is available
foryourvehicle.Itholdsuptosix
discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the in-dash
CD player.
Load the desired CDs in the
magazine and load the magazine in
the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
Play only standard round discs. Odd-
shaped CDs may jam in the drive or
cause other problems.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed.
To select a different disc, use the
Preset 5 (DISC ) or Preset 6
(DISC ) button. Press the Preset 6
button to select the next disc in the
magazine. Press the Preset 5 button
to select the previous disc. If you
select an empty slot in the magazine,
the changer will, after finding that
slot empty, try to load the CD in the
next slot. This continues until it finds
a CD to load and play.
If you load a CD in the in-dash player
while the changer is playing a CD,
the system will stop the changer and
begin playing the in-dash CD. To
select the changer again, press the
CD button. Play will begin where it
left off. Use the CD button to switch
between the player and the changer.
If you eject the in-dash CD while it is
playing, the system will automatically
switch to the CD changer and begin
play where it left off. If there are no
CDs in the changer, the display will
flash. You will have to select another
mode (Radio or Cassette Player).
When you switch back to CD mode,
the system selects the same unit (in-
dash or changer) that was playing
when you switched out of CD mode.
To use the SKIP, REPEAT, and
RANDOM functions, refer to the in-
dash player operating instructions.
For information on how to handle
and protect compact discs, see page
.192
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Operating the CD Changer
(Optional)
Protecting Compact Discs
214
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
player,findthecauseinthechartto
the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Indication Cause Solution
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error, or a
DVD has been loaded in
the CD player.
High Temperature
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CD
player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out, or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Honda dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
CD Player Error Indications
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
215
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indication
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the optional
CD changer, find the cause in the
chart to the right. If you cannot clear
the error indication, take the vehicle
to your Honda dealer.
Cause Solution
FOCUS Error
No CD in the CD
magazine.
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
No CD magazine in the
CD changer.
Press the magazine eject button, pull out the
magazine, and check for an error indication.
Insert the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Insert CD.
Press the magazine eject button, pull out the
magazine, and check for an error indication.
Insert the magazine again. If the code does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
consult your Honda dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Insert CD magazine.
Audio System
Comfort and Convenience Features
CD Changer Error Indications
216
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Your Honda is equipped with a Rear
Entertainment System that includes
a DVD player for the enjoyment of
the rear passengers. With this
system, the rear passengers can
enjoy a different entertainment
source (radio, cassette player, CD
player or DVD player) than the front
seat occupants.
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the Rear Entertainment
System.
Turn on the rear system by pressing
the REAR PWR button. The rear
entertainment system can then be
operated from the front control panel,
the rear control panel on the ceiling,
or with the remote control. The right
display then shows the information
for the rear system.
Optional on EX-L model
Comfort and Convenience Features
Rear Entertainment System
217
REAR PWR
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the rear system is turned on, it
selects the entertainment source it
waslastsetto.Ifthatsourcehas
been removed (the DVD has been
ejected from the player, for example),
youwillsee‘‘____’’inthedisplay.
You must select another source.
When you turn on the rear system,
the rear speakers are automatically
turned off. You will see the Rear
SpeakersOfficonintherightdisplay.
The sound for the rear system is
sent to the wireless headphones. If
youwanttoturntherearspeakers
on again, press and hold the REAR
PWR button until they come on.
NOTE: The rear speakers are
connected to the front system, so
they will always play the source that
the front system is set to. For
example, if you are listening to the
radio, and your rear passengers are
listening to a CD through the
headphones, the rear speakers will
play the radio when you turn them
on. To have the vehicle speakers
play the CD, change the front source
from AM/FM to CD.
Pressing the RR CTRL selector knob
turns off the rear controls. Your
passengers are not able to operate
the rear system with the control
panel in the ceiling or with the
remote control. You will see the Rear
ControlsOfficonintherightdisplay.
Press the selector knob again to turn
the rear controls back on.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Rear Entertainment System
218
REAR PWR
BUTTON
RR CTRL
SELECTOR KNOB
REAR CONTROLS
OFF ICON
REAR SPEAKERS
OFF ICON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The DVD player in your Rear
Entertainment System can play DVD
video discs and CDs. It features
Dolby noise reduction. The video
screen is designed for use by the
rear seat passengers only.
The driver and front seat passenger
should not try to view the screen
while driving.
Open the overhead screen by
pushingonthebutton.Thescreen
will swing down part-way. Pivot the
screen the rest of the way. If you
pivot the screen too far forward, past
the detent, the display will turn off.
Pivot the screen back to the detent
to turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
The DVD player is located under the
front control panel. Insert the disc
into the DVD slot. Push the disc in
halfway, the drive will pull it in the
rest of the way.
Press the eject button to remove the
disc from the drive.
Follow the instructions on the
following pages to operate the DVD
player from the front control panel,
the rear control panel, or with the
remote control.
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-
ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Rear Video Operation
219
REAR CONTROL
PANEL
BUTTON
OVERHEAD
SCREEN
DVD SLOT
EJECT
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To return front panel control to the
front audio system, turn the knob
counterclockwise. The system will
automatically change back to the
front system several seconds after
you stop pressing the buttons.
To operate the rear entertainment
system from the front panel, you
must first turn the RR CTRL knob
clockwise to enable the panel. The
amber RR LED will come on to show
that the control panel is now enabled.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Rear Entertainment System
Operating the DVD Player from
the Front Control Panel
220
RR CTRL SELECTOR
KNOB
REAR PWR
BUTTON
RR LED
RDM
BUTTON
PLAY
BUTTON
PAUSE
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
RPT
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
−
＋
−
−
Some DVDs start playing
automatically after the disc is loaded
completely. If a disc does not start
playing, press the PLAY button. If
the system is in PAUSE mode, press
the PLAY button to cancel the
PAUSE mode.
Press the PAUSE button to pause
the disc. Press the button again or
press the PLAY button to return to
PLAY. PAUSE works only with
DVDs.
Press the RPT button to
continuously replay the current track.
You will see RPT in the display.
Press the button again to turn it off.
RPT works only with CDs.
To play the tracks within a CD in
random order, press the RDM
button. You will see RDM in the
display. Press the button again to
cancel RDM. RDM works only with
CDs.
You can move rapidly within a track
or a chapter by pressing the SEEK/
SKIP bar. Press and hold the side
to move forward, You will see ‘‘CUE’’
in the display. Press and hold the
side to move backward, You will see
‘‘REV’’ in the display. Release the bar
when the system reaches the point
you want.
Each time you press and release the
side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, the
system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track or
chapter. Press and release the
side of the bar to skip backward to
the beginning of the current track or
chapter. If you press the side of
the bar while the beginning of a
track or chapter is playing, the
system skips to the beginning of the
previous track or chapter.
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
PLAY Button
PAUSE Button
SEEK/SKIP Bar RPT Button
RDM Button
221
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
You can control some DVD functions
from the rear control panel in the
ceiling Make sure the rear control
operation has not been disabled with
theRRCTRLknobonthefront
panel.
Use these buttons to select the
entertainment source (radio,
cassette player, CD player/CD
changer, or DVD player/Auxiliary
device). The selected source will be
showninthedisplay.
Press this button when you want to
pause a DVD. Press this button
again to go back to Play. To select the menu on the DVD,
press the MENU button. Use the
, , , and buttons to
move to the desired menu selection,
then press the ENT button to enter
your selection.
Pressthe buttontoskiptothe
beginning of the next chapter. Press
the buttontoskipbacktothe
beginning of the current chapter.
If you press the button while the
beginning of a chapter is playing, the
system skips to the beginning of the
previous chapter.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Rear Entertainment System
Operating the DVD Player from
the Rear Control Panel
Source Selection Buttons
PLAY/PAUSE/PROG Button
MENU/ENT Buttons
SEEK/SKIP Buttons
222
SOURCE SELECTION
BUTTONS
REAR CONTROLS
OFF INDICATOR
MENU
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BUTTON
CH/DISK
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BUTTON
CH/DISK
BUTTON
ENT BUTTONPLAY/PAUSE/PROG
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
You can control all of the DVD
functions with the remote control.
Make sure the rear control operation
has not been disabled with the RR
CTRL knob on the front panel.
When using the remote control,
point it at the rear control panel in
the ceiling.
Press this button to start playing a
DVD.
Use these buttons to select the
entertainment source (radio,
cassette player, CD player/CD
changer, or DVD player/Auxiliary
device). The selected source will be
showninthedisplay.
Comfort and Convenience Features
Rear Entertainment System
Operating the DVD Player with
the Remote Control
Source Selection Buttons
PLAY/PROG Button
223
SOURCE SELECTION
BUTTONS
SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS
DISP BUTTON
RETURN (T/C) BUTTON
REW/FWD BUTTONS
STOP BUTTON
PAUSE BUTTON
PLAY/PROG BUTTON
MENU BUTTON
SUBTITLE BUTTON
AUDIO BUTTON
ANGLE BUTTON
TITLE BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Press this button when you want to
pause a DVD. Press this button
again to go back to Play.
Some DVDs have menus that allow
you to select a dubbed language,
subtitles, a chapter list, previews, etc.
Themenucontentswillvaryfrom
DVD to DVD.
Press the MENU button to display
the DVD’s main menu. Use the ,
, , and buttons to select
the desired menu option. Then press
ENT to enter your selection.
If the menu has more than one page,
use the and buttons
to change pages.
You can also use the numbered
buttons to enter the number of a
menu option. You do not have to
press ENT, the option will be
selected when you complete the
number. Make sure you enter two
digits. If the option number is less
than 10, enter a ‘‘0’’ first.
Some DVDs have a title menu. The
contents of the menu vary from
DVD to DVD.
Press the TITLE button to display
the title menu window. Move your
selection by pressing the , ,
and buttons. Enter your
selection by pressing the ENT
button. If the menu has more than
onepage,usethe and
buttons to change pages.
Press the TITLE button again to
close the window.
Many DVDs are recorded with
subtitles, sometimes in multiple
languages. To select subtitles, press
the SUBTITLE button. Continue to
press and release the SUBTITLE
button to scan through the available
languages.
Press this button to stop playing a
DVD.
Pressthe buttontoskiptothe
beginning of the next chapter. Press
the buttontoskipbacktothe
beginning of the current chapter.
Press the button to move
forward rapidly within a chapter. You
will see CUE in the display. Press the
button to move backward
rapidly within a chapter. You will see
REV in the display. Release the
button when the system reaches the
point you want.
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
PAUSE Button MENU Button TITLE Button
SUBTITLE Button
STOP Button
SKIP Buttons
FWD/REW Buttons
224
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Many DVDs are recorded, or
dubbed, in more than one language.
To select a different language than
the one being heard, press the
AUDIO button. Continue to press
and release the AUDIO button to
hear all the available languages.
To change the color, contrast, aspect
ratio, and brightness of the video
screen, press the DISP button. The
current setting of one will be
displayed on the screen each time
you press the button. Use the
and buttons to change the
setting as desired. The display will
disappear from the screen several
seconds after you stop adjusting the
setting.
On some DVDs, the scenes are
recorded by more than one camera,
giving different viewpoints of the
same scene. By pressing the Angle
button, you can select a different
viewpoint.
In the MENU selection mode,
pressing the RETURN button for
less than two seconds changes the
MENU display to the previous page.
Pressing the RETURN button for
more than two seconds while a DVD
is playing brings the system into the
TITLE enter mode. When you enter
your selection, the DVD player will
start playing from the selected title.
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
AUDIO Button
DISP Button
ANGLE Button
RETURN (T/C) Button
225
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The tips on how to handle and
protect DVDs are basically the same
as those for compact discs. Refer to
‘‘Protecting Compact Discs’’ on page
.
There are various types of DVDs
available. Some of them are not
compatible with your system.
The DVD player in your Rear
Entertainment System can play DVD
video discs and CDs bearing the
above marks on their packages or
jackets.
Those packages or jackets should
also bear the area designation of ‘‘1’’
or ‘‘ALL’’.
DVD-ROMs cannot be played in this
system.
192
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Protecting DVDsPlayable DVDs
226
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indication Solution
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the DVD
player,findthecauseinthechartto
the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the vehicle to
your Honda dealer.
Cause
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the
DVD Player.
Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.
Check the disc for damage or deformation.
If the DVD cannot be pulled out or the error
indication does not disappear after the disc is
ejected, see your Honda dealer.
Do not try to force the disc out of the player.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Run the engine to recharge the battery.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
Low Vehicle Battery
Voltage
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
DVDPlayerErrorIndications
227
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
An audio CD can be played in either
the main CD player in the front panel,
in the DVD/CD player below the
front panel, or in the optional CD
changer. This allows the front and
rear passengers to listen to different
CDs.
Select the rear system by turning the
RR CTRL knob clockwise. If the CD
is loaded in the main CD player, or
CD changer, select CD/CHG. If the
CD is loaded in the lower player,
select DVD/AUX.
IftheCDisloadedinthemainCD
player or CD changer, refer to pages
and for operating
instructions. If the CD is loaded in
the DVD/AUX player, refer to page
.
IftheCDisloadedinthemainCD
player or optional CD changer, select
it by pressing the CD/CHG button.
If it is loaded in the lower player,
press DVD/AUX.
Pressthe buttontoskiptothe
beginning of the next track. Press
the button to return to the
beginning of current track. Press it
again to go to the beginning of the
previous track.
If the CD changer is selected, use
the and buttons to change
discs.
IftheCDisloadedinthemainCD
player or optional CD changer, select
it by pressing the CD/CHG button.
If it is loaded in the lower player,
press DVD/AUX.
Pressthe buttontoskiptothe
beginning of the next track. Press
the button to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it again to go to the beginning of the
previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdeithertheFWDorREW
buttons. When you press FWD, you
will see ‘‘CUE’’ in the display. When
you press REW, you will see ‘‘REV’’
in the display. Release the button
when the system reaches the desired
point.
212 214
220
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Playing a CD With the Rear
Entertainment System
Playing a CD With the Front Panel
Playing a CD With the Rear Control
Panel
Playing a CD With the Remote
Control
228
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
Select the radio with the AM/FM
buttononthefrontpanel,therear
control panel, or the remote control.
From the front panel, after selecting
the rear system with the RR CTRL
knob, use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN functions or the Preset
buttons to select a station.
From the rear control panel in the
ceiling, use the and
buttons to select the stations
that are set into the Preset buttons.
Pressing the or button will
cause the system to search up or
down the band for a station with a
strong signal. You will see SEEK in
the display.
To change Preset stations with the
remote control, press the or
button. To search for strong
stations, press the or
button.
After loading the cassette, select the
cassette player with the TAPE
buttononthefrontpanel,therear
control panel, or the remote control.
On the rear control panel, use the
PROG/PLAY button to reverse the
tape’s direction. Use the and
buttons to skip. Press the
button to skip forward to the
beginning of the next song or
passage. You will see FF flashing in
the display. Press the button to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current song or passage. You will
seeREVflashinginthedisplay.
To operate the cassette player from
the front panel, refer to page .
Make sure you have selected the
rear system with the RR CTRL knob
first.
On the remote control, use the
PROG/PLAY button to reverse the
tape’s direction. Press the FWD or
REW button to fast forward or
rewind the tape. Press either of
those buttons or the PROG/PLAY
button to return to playing the tape.
To skip to the beginning of the next
song or passage, press the
button. You will see FF
flashinginthedisplay.Toskiptothe
beginning of the current song or
passage, press the button. You
will see REW flashing in the display.
209
Playing the Radio With the Rear
Entertainment System
Playing a Cassette With the Rear
Entertainment System
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
229
Main Menu
Table of Contents
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
To replace the batteries in the
remote control, put a coin in the
notch on the back. Turn it one-
quarter, then slide the cover off.
Remove the old batteries. Make sure
the polarity of new batteries is
correct when you install them. Install
the cover by sliding it on until it
locks. The remote control uses two
AA batteries.
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Replacing Remote Control
Batteries
230
BATTERIES
COVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The audio for the rear entertainment
system is sent to the wireless
headphones that come with the
system. To turn on the headphones,
presstheredbuttonontheearpiece.
Adjust the volume level with the dial
at the bottom of the same earpiece.
To adjust the comfort of the
headphones, slide the earpieces up
or down the headband.
For greater battery life, turn off the
headphones when they are not in use
by pressing the red button again.
They will turn off automatically if
they do not receive an audio signal
from the system for several minutes.
When not in use, store the
headphones in the pocket on the
back of either front seat.
Some state and local goverment
agencies prohibit the use of
headphones by the driver of a motor
vehicle. Always obey applicable laws
and regulations.
When you are not using the remote
control, store it in the holder. Place
the remote control in the holder with
the front end out. Put the holder into
the front seat-back pocket and hook
it on the edge of the seat-back
pocket as shown.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Wireless HeadphonesStoring the Remote Control
231
ON/OFF BUTTON
VOLUME
DIAL
HOLDER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The batteries are under the domed
covers on the back of each earpiece.
Toremoveacover,putacoininthe
notch at the bottom of the earpiece,
and turn it one-quarter to pop up the
cover. Slide the upper side of the
cover backward (away from the
headband), then lift it up.
Remove the battery and note its
polarity. Install the new battery in
the earpiece with the polarity the
same. Set the cover in place, then
slide it up until it locks. Each
headphone uses two AAA batteries.
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
Replacing Batteries
232
COVER
BATTERY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Auxiliary input jacks and headphone
connectors for the rear
entertainment system are under the
third seat armrest on the driver’s
side. To access these connectors,
open the cover by pulling up on the
lever.
There are three headphone
connectors for the third seat
passengers. Each connector has its
own volume control.
The system will accept auxiliary
inputs from standard video games
and video equipment.
Some video game power supplies
may cause poor picture quality.
Auxiliary Input Jacks
Rear Entertainment System
Comfort and Convenience Features
233
ARMREST
LEVER
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS
VOLUME DIALS
HEADPHONE CONNECTORS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicleorremovetheradio.This
alarm continues for two minutes,
then the alarm stops. To reset an
alarming system before the two
minutes have elapsed, unlock either
front door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
The security system sets
automatically fifteen seconds after
you lock the doors, hood, and
tailgate. For the system to activate,
you must lock the doors from the
outside with the key, the lock tab,
the door lock switch, or the remote
transmitter. The security system
light next to the low oil pressure
indicator starts blinking immediately
to show you the system is setting
itself.
Once the security system is set,
opening any door (without using the
key or the remote transmitter), or
the hood, will cause it to alarm. It
also alarms if the radio is removed
from the dashboard or the wiring is
cut.
With the system set, you can still
open the tailgate with the master key
or the remote transmitter without
triggering the alarm. The alarm will
sound if the tailgate lock is forced, or
smashed.
The security system will not set if
the hood, tailgate, or any door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the Door Lamp Monitor on
the instrument panel (see page ),
to see if the doors and tailgate are
fully closed. Since it is not part of the
monitor display, manually check the
hood.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
75
On EX and EX-L models
Security System
Comfort and Convenience Features
234
SECURITY SYSTEM
LIGHT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push in the Cruise Control Master
Switch to the left of the steering
column. The indicator in the
switch will light.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Press and release the SET/decel
buttononthesteeringwheel.The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel comes on to
show the system is now activated.
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
conditions such as city driving,
winding roads, slippery roads, heavy
rain, or bad weather. You should
have full control of the vehicle under
those conditions.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Using the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
235
CRUISE CONTROL MASTER SWITCH
RESUME/accel
CANCEL
SET/decel
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the SET/decel
button. The vehicle will decelerate.
Release the button when you
reach the desired speed.
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL light on the instru-
ment panel will go out. When the
vehicle slows to the desired speed,
press the SET/decel button. The
vehicle will then maintain the
desired speed.
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RESUME/
accel button. The vehicle will
accelerate. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-
celerate to the desired cruising
speed and press the SET/decel
button.
Thecruisecontrolmaynotholdthe
set speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down to the desired speed. This
will cancel the cruise control. To
resume the set speed, press the
RESUME/accel button. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel comes on.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RESUME/
accel button repeatedly. Each time
you do this, your vehicle will speed
up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/decel
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your vehicle will slow
down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
236
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youcancancelthecruisecontrolin
any of these ways:
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Press the Cruise Control Master
Switch.
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
will cause the cruise control to
cancel.
Tap the brake pedal.
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake pedal, the CRUISE
CONTROL light on the instrument
panel will go out and the vehicle will
begin to slow down. You can use the
accelerator pedal in the normal way.
The system remembers the
previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
above25mph(40km/h)andthen
press and release the RESUME/
accel button. The CRUISE
CONTROL light comes on. The
vehicle will accelerate to the same
cruising speed as before.
Pressing the Cruise Control Master
Switch turns the system completely
off and erases the previous cruising
speed from memory. To use the
system again, refer to
.
Using the
Cruise Control
Cancelling the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Comfort and Convenience Features
237
CANCEL
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always refer to the operating
instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door
opener or other equipment you
intend to operate with the HomeLink
Universal Transceiver. If you do not
have this information, you should
contact the manufacturer of the
equipment.
While training or using HomeLink,
make sure you have a clear view of
the garage door or gate, and that no
one will be injured by its movement.
If your garage door opener was
manufactured before April 1982, you
may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. Garage door
openers manufactured before that
date do not have a safety feature that
causes them to stop and reverse if an
obstacle is detected during closing,
increasing the risk of injury. If you
have questions, call (800) 355-3515.
If you are training HomeLink to
operate a garage door or gate, it is
recommended that you unplug the
motor for that device during training.
Repeatedly pressing the remote
control button could burn out the
motor.
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
or would like information on home
products that can be operated by the
transmitter, call (800) 355-3515. On
the Internet, go to www.homelink.
com.
The HomeLink Universal
Transceiver built into your vehicle
canbeprogrammedtooperate
remotely-controlled devices around
your home, such as garage doors,
lighting, or home security systems. It
can replace up to three remote
transmitters.
The HomeLink transmitter stores
the code in a permanent memory.
There should be no need to retrain
the transmitter if your vehicle’s
battery goes dead or is disconnected.
On EX and EX-L models
Important Safety Precautions
General Information
Customer Assistance
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Comfort and Convenience Features
238
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to Step 1.
Unplug the garage door opener
motor from the house current.
Before you can use HomeLink to
operate devices around your home, it
must ‘‘learn’’ the proper codes. For
example, to train HomeLink to open
and close the garage door:
If you just took
delivery of your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button. To do this,
press and hold the two outside
buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 20 seconds,
until the red light flashes. Release
the buttons, then proceed to Step 1.
Holdtheendofthegaragedoor
opener remote control 2 to 5
inches from HomeLink. Make
sure you are not blocking your
view of the red light in HomeLink.
Select the HomeLink button you
want to train.
Press the button on the remote
control and the button on
HomeLink at the same time. Hold
down both buttons.
2.
3.
4.
1.
CONTINUED
Training HomeLink
Before you begin
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Comfort and Convenience Features
239
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Canadian Owners:
The remote control you are training
from may stop transmitting after two
seconds. This is not long enough for
HomeLink to learn the code. Release
and press the button on the remote
control every two seconds until
HomeLink has learned the code.
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener are needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure
synchronizes HomeLink to the
garage door opener so they send and
receive the correct codes.
The red light in HomeLink should
begin flashing. It will flash slowly
at first, then rapidly.
When the red light flashes rapidly,
release both buttons. HomeLink
should have learned the code from
the remote control.
Plug in the garage door opener
motor, then test the HomeLink
transceiver button by pushing it. It
should operate the garage door.
If the button does not work, repeat
this procedure to train it again. If it
still does not work, you may have a
variable or rolling code garage
door opener. Test this by pressing
and holding the HomeLink
transceiver button you just trained.
If the red light blinks for two
seconds,thenstayson,youhavea
rolling code garage door opener.
You may be able to verify this with
the manufacturer’s documentation.
Go to ‘‘Training With a Rolling
Code System.’’
Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other remotely-
controlled devices around your
home (lighting, automatic gate,
security system, etc.).
5.
6.
8.
7.
Training With a Rolling Code
System
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Comfort and Convenience Features
240
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Itmaybehelpfultohavesomeone
assist you with this procedure.
Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer. The
manufacturer’s documentation
may help.
Press the Training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
light next to the button comes on,
then release it. The light may blink,
or come on and stay on. You then
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
Press and hold the button on
HomeLink for 3 4 seconds.
(The same button you trained with
the ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure.)
Press the HomeLink button again.
It should operate the garage door.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button again for 3 4 seconds.
This should turn off the training
light on the garage door opener
unit. (Some systems may require
youtopressthebuttonuptothree
times.)
6.
2.
4.
5.
1.
3.
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Comfort and Convenience Features
241
TRAINING BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Totrainanalreadyprogrammed
transmitter button to operate a new
device:
Toerasethecodesstoredinallthree
buttons, press and hold the two
outside buttons until the red light
begins to flash, then release the
buttons.
Select the HomeLink button you
want to train.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button until the red light begins to
flash slowly (approximately 20
seconds).
While continuing to hold the
HomeLink button, place the
remotecontrolforthedevice2to
5inchesfromHomeLink.
Release both buttons. HomeLink
should now be trained to operate
the device.
Press and hold the button on the
remote control. Hold both buttons
until the red light begins to flash
rapidly.
Youshoulderaseallthreecodes
before selling the vehicle.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.Retraining a Button
Erasing Codes
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Comfort and Convenience Features
242
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before you begin driving your Honda,
youshouldknowwhatgasolineto
use, and how to check the levels of
important fluids. You also need to
know how to properly store luggage
or packages. The information in this
section will help you. If you plan to
add any accessories to your vehicle,
please read the information in this
section first.
.............................Break-in Period . 244
.........................................Gasoline . 244
.........Service Station Procedures . 245
................Filling the Fuel Tank . 245
....................Opening the Hood . 246
...............................Oil Check . 248
.........Engine Coolant Check . 249
...............................Fuel Economy . 250
.....................Vehicle Condition . 250
...........................Driving Habits . 250
...Accessories and Modifications . 251
.............................Carrying Cargo . 253
Before Driving
Before Driving
243
Main Menu
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoidhardbraking.Newbrakes
need to be broken-in by moderate
use for the first 200 miles (300
km).
Your Honda is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 86 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise in the engine that can lead to
mechanical damage.
Youshouldfollowthesesamere-
commendations with an overhauled
or exchanged engine, or when the
brakes are replaced.
We also recommend that you should
not tow a trailer during the first 500
miles (800 km).
We recommend gasolines containing
detergent additives that help prevent
fuel system and engine deposits.
Using gasoline containing lead will
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls. This contributes to air
pollution.
Do not change the oil until the
recommended time or mileage
intervalshowninthemaintenance
schedule.
Break-in Period, Gasoline
Before Driving
Break-in Period Gasoline
244
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Because the fuel fill cap is on the
driver’s side of the vehicle, park
with that side closest to the
service station pumps.
Open the fuel fill door by pulling
onthehandletotheleftofthe
driver’s seat.
In Canada, some gasolines contain
an octane-enhancing additive called
MMT. If you use such gasolines,
your emission control system
performance may deteriorate and
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on.
If this happens, contact your
authorized Honda dealer for service.
Before refueling, make sure the rear
sliding door on the driver’s side is
closed.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Before Driving
Filling the Fuel Tank
Gasoline, Service Station Procedures
245
Pull
FUEL FILL CAP
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
Place the cap in the holder on the
fuel fill door.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
Shift to Park or Neutral and set
the parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on,
tighten it until it clicks several
times. If you do not properly
tighten the cap, the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp may come on (see
page ).
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Your vehicle has an on-board
refueling vapor recovery system to
help keep fuel vapors from going
into the atmosphere. If the fuel
nozzle keeps clicking off even
though the tank is not full, there may
be a problem with this system.
Consult your dealer.
1.
3.
4.
5.
6.
371
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Opening the Hood
246
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Pull the support rod out of its clip
and insert the end into the hole on
the driver’s side of the hood.
If you can open the hood without
lifting the hood latch handle, or the
hood latch handle moves stiffly or
does not spring back as before, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated (see page ).
Standing in front of the vehicle,
put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood. The hood latch
handle is above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Pull
up on this handle until it releases
the hood. Lift the hood.
3.2.
313
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
247
LATCH
SUPPORT ROD
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Wipe the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Check the engine oil level every time
you fill the vehicle with fuel. Wait a
few minutes after turning the engine
off before you check the oil.
Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender,thenletitdrop.
Afterclosingthehood,makesureit
is securely latched.
2.
1.
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
Oil Check
248
DIPSTICK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Refer to
on page for information
on checking other items in your
Honda.
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
Insert it all the way back in its tube. Remove the dipstick again and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
4.3.
297
301
295
Before Driving
Service Station Procedures
Owner Maintenance
Checks
Adding
Engine Coolant
Adding Oil
Engine Coolant Check
249
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
MAX RESERVE TANK
MIN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The condition of your vehicle and
your driving habits are the two most
important things that affect the fuel
mileage you get.
Always maintain your vehicle accord-
ing to the maintenance schedule.
This will keep it in top operating
condition.
A cold engine uses more fuel than a
warm engine. It is not necessary to
‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting it
idle for a long time. You can drive
away in about a minute, no matter
how cold it is outside. The engine
will warm up faster, and you get
better fuel economy. To cut down on
the number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try to
combine several short trips into one.
You can improve fuel economy by
driving moderately. Rapid acceler-
ation, abrupt cornering, and hard
braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear that
allows the engine to run and acceler-
ate smoothly.
Depending on traffic conditions, try
to maintain a constant speed. Every
time you slow down and speed up,
your vehicle uses extra fuel. Use the
cruise control, when appropriate, to
increase fuel economy.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
usemorefuel.TurnofftheA/Cto
cut down on air conditioning use.
Use the flow-through ventilation
when the outside air temperature is
moderate.
In winter, the build-up of snow on
your vehicle’s underside adds weight
and rolling resistance. Frequent
cleaning helps your fuel mileage and
reduces the chance of corrosion.
An important part of that mainte-
nance is the
(see page ). For
example, an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses fuel. It also wears out
faster, so check the tire pressure at
least monthly.
295
Vehicle Condition
Driving Habits
Owner Maintenance
Checks
Before Driving
Fuel Economy
250
Main Menu
Table of Contents
However, if electronic accessories
are improperly installed, or exceed
your vehicle’s electrical system
capacity, they can interfere with the
operation of your vehicle, or even
cause the airbags to deploy.
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ).
Have the installer contact your
Honda dealer for assistance before
installing any electronic accessory.
If possible, have your dealer inspect
the final installation.
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before
you make any modifications or add
anyaccessories,besuretoreadthe
following information.
Before installing any accessory:
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer-controlled systems, such
as the SRS and anti-lock brake
system.
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Non-Honda accessories are usually
designed for universal applications.
Although aftermarket accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability. (See
‘‘Modifications’’ on page for
additional information.)
374
252
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
251
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Covering the outside edge of a
front seat-back, with a non-Honda
seat cover for example, could
prevent the airbag from inflating
properly.
If a side airbag
inflates,acupholderorotherhard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
vehicle and hurt someone.
This could make the driver’s seat
position sensor and the front
passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective.
Some examples are:
Lowering the vehicle with an
aftermarket suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to impact speed
bumps or other raised objects,
which could cause the airbags to
deploy.
Raising the vehicle with an
aftermarket suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Aftermarket wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Do not modify your steering wheel
or any other part of your
Supplemental Restraint System.
Modifications could make the
system ineffective.
Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard, could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult with your Honda dealer.
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with non-
Honda (aftermarket) components
could seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Modifications
Additional Safety Precautions
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
Do not place any objects over the
outsideedgeofafrontseat-back.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a front door.
Do not modify the front seats.Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
252
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas so you can stow cargo
safely.
The glove box, and the pockets in
the front doors and seat-backs, are
designed for small, lightweight items.
The cargo area is intended for larger,
heavier items. In addition, the seats
in the second row can be removed
andthebenchseatinthethirdrow
can be folded into the floor to allow
you to carry more cargo or longer
items.
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability, and
operation, and make it unsafe.
Before carrying any type of cargo, be
sure to read the following pages.
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
253
REAR COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET
CENTER POCKET
GLOVE BOX
STORAGE BOX
SEAT-BACK POCKET
EX and EX-L models only
CARGO AREA
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, or with the proper
operation of the seats.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If the lid is open, a
passenger could injure their knees
during a crash or sudden stop.
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, accessories,
and the tongue weight if you are
towing a trailer.
The final number is the total weight
of cargo you can carry.
If you are towing a trailer, add the
tongue weight to the number
above.
Add up the weight of all occupants.
To figure out how much cargo you
can carry:
When you load luggage, the total
weight of the vehicle, all passengers,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The load
for the front and rear axles also must
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). The GVWR and
GAWRareprintedonthetire
information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb (see page ).
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 1,158 lbs (525 kg).
Subtract the total from 1,158 lbs
(525 kg).
386
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Load Limit
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
254
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of
, follow the instructions
on page .
The side cargo net can be installed
on the driver’s side panel in the
cargo area to secure small items. To
install the side cargo net, hook each
loop on the four corners of the net to
the tabs on the left side panel. When
youfolddownthethirdseat,store
the head restraints in the side cargo
net.
If you carry any items on a roof
top carrier, be sure the total
weight of the rack and the items
on it does not exceed 150 lb
(68 kg).
If you use an accessory roof top
carrier, the roof top carrier weight
limit may be lower. Refer to the
information that came with your roof
top carrier.
66
carbon monoxide
poisoning
Side Cargo NetCarrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
or on a Roof Top Carrier
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
255
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can use the cargo net to secure
items in the cargo area, and store
small items between the two halves
of the net. To install the cargo net,
hook the loops on the four corners of
the net to the tabs at both sides of
the tailgate sill.
There are cargo hooks for plastic
grocery bags on the back of the third
row seat. They are designed to hold
light items. Heavy objects may
damage the hooks.
On EX and EX-L models
Carrying Cargo
Cargo Net Cargo Hooks
Before Driving
256
CARGO HOOKS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the Traction Control System,
and facts you need if you are
planning to tow a trailer.
........................Preparing to Drive . 258
.......................Starting the Engine . 259
Starting in Cold Weather
....................at High Altitude . 259
..............Automatic Transmission . 260
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 260
................Shift Lever Positions . 261
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 263
....................Shift Lock Release . 263
...........................................Parking . 265
.....................The Braking System . 266
.............Brake Wear Indicators . 266
...............Brake System Design . 267
.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 267
Important Safety
.........................Reminders . 268
........................ABS Indicator . 268
..............Traction Control System . 269
...............TCS ON/OFF Switch . 270
............................TCS Indicator . 271
...............Driving in Bad Weather . 272
...........................Towing a Trailer . 274
Driving
Driving
257
Main Menu
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments every day before
you drive your vehicle.
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check the adjustment of the seat
(see page ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the adjustment of the
steering wheel (see page ).
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Check the indicator lights in the
instrument panel.
Start the engine (see page ).
Check the gauges and indicator
lights in the instrument panel (see
page ).
Check that any items you may be
carrying with you inside are stored
properly or fastened down
securely.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
Check that the hood and tailgate
arefullyclosed. Makesurethedoorsandtailgate
are securely closed and locked.
3.
2.
1.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
11.
12.
10.
128
88
17
259
71
110
Preparing to Drive
Driving
258
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. If the engine
does not start right away, do not
hold the key in START (III) for
more than 15 seconds at a time.
Pause for at least 10 seconds
before trying again.
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed half-way
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
If the engine still does not start,
press the accelerator pedal all the
way down and hold it there while
starting in order to clear flooding.
As before, keep the ignition key in
the START (III) position for no
more than 15 seconds. Return to
step 5 if the engine does not start.
If it starts, lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal so the engine
does not race.
An engine is harder to start in cold
weather. The thinner air found at
high altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to the problem.
Use the following procedure:
Turn off all electrical accessories
to reduce the drain on the battery.
Push the accelerator pedal half-
way to the floor and hold it there
while starting the engine. Do not
hold the ignition key in START
(III) for more than 15 seconds.
When the engine starts, release
the accelerator pedal gradually as
the engine speeds up and smooths
out.
If the engine fails to start in step 2,
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor and hold it there while you
try to start the engine for no more
than 15 seconds. If the engine
does not start, return to step 2.
1.
2.
3.
5.
6.1.
2.
3.
4.
Starting the Engine
Driving
Starting in Cold Weather at High
Altitude (Above 8,000 feet/
2,400 meters)
259
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator on the instrument
panel shows which position the shift
lever is in.
Your Honda’s transmission has five
forward speeds, and is electronically
controlled for smoother shifting. It
also has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converter
forbetterfueleconomy.Youmay
feel what seems like another shift
when the converter locks.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If it
flashes while driving (in any shift
position), it indicates a possible
problem in the transmission. Avoid
rapid acceleration and have the trans-
missioncheckedbyanauthorized
Honda dealer as soon as possible.
The malfunction indicator lamp may
come on along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator
if there is a problem in the automatic
transmission control system.
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Shift Lever Position Indicator
260
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
CONTINUED
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Pull the shift lever
towards you, then move it out of
Park.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on page
.
You must also pull the shift lever
towards you to shift into Park. To
avoid transmission damage, come to
a complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
The shift lever has seven positions.
It must be in Park or Neutral to start
the engine. When you are stopped in
D, D , 2, 1, N or R, press firmly on
the brake pedal, and keep your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
263
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
pull the shift lever towards
you.
Pull the shift lever towards
you.
Move the lever.
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoD
DtoN
DtoD
NtoD
RtoN
3
3
3
3
3
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Park (P)Shift Lever Positions
261
SHIFT LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to Park posi-
tion if you need to leave the vehicle
for any reason. Press on the brake pe-
dal when you are moving the shift
lever from Neutral to another gear.
To shift to Reverse
from Park, see the explanation under
Park. To shift to Reverse from
Neutral, come to a complete stop and
then shift. Pull the shift lever
towards you before shifting into
Reverse from Neutral.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The transmis-
sion automatically selects a suitable
gear for your speed and acceleration.
You may notice the transmission
shifting up at higher speeds when
the engine is cold. This helps the
engine warm up faster.
This position is similar
to D, except only the first three
gears are selected. Use D when
towing a trailer in hilly terrain, or to
provide engine braking when going
down a steep hill. D can also keep
the transmission from cycling
between third and fourth gears in
stop-and-go driving.
ForfasteraccelerationwheninD or
D, you can get the transmission to
automatically downshift by pushing
the accelerator pedal to the floor.
The transmission will shift down one
or two gears, depending on your
speed.
3
3
3
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Neutral (N)
Reverse (R)
Drive (D)
Drive (D )
3
262
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
To shift to Second,
pull the shift lever towards you, then
shift to the lower gear. This position
locks the transmission in second
gear. It does not downshift to first
gear when you come to a stop.
Second gives you more power when
climbing, and increased engine
braking when going down steep hills.
Usesecondgearwhenstartingout
on a slippery surface or in deep snow.
It will help reduce wheelspin.
When driving down hill with a trailer,
use the Second position.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pulling the shift lever does
not work.
Set the Parking brake.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Place a cloth on the edge of the
Shift Lock Release slot cover on
the steering column. Remove the
cover by carefully prying on the
edge with a small flat-tipped
screwdriver (not included in the
tool kit).
To shift from Second to
First, pull the shift lever towards you,
then shift to the lower gear. With the
lever in this position, the transmis-
sion locks in First gear. By upshift-
ing and downshifting through 1, 2,
D , and D, you can operate this
transmission much like a manual
transmission without a clutch pedal.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
3
Automatic Transmission
Driving
Second (2) Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock Release
First (1)
263
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Insert the key in the Shift Lock
Release slot.
Push down on the key while you
pull the shift lever towards you
and move it out of Park to Neutral.
Remove the key from the Shift
Lock Release slot, then install a
new cover. Depress the brake
pedal and restart the engine.
If you need to use the Shift Lock
Release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your Honda
dealer.
4.
5.
6.
Automatic Transmission
Driving
264
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT COVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. The indicator
on the instrument panel shows that
the parking brake is not fully
released; it does not indicate that the
parking brake is firmly set. Make
sure the parking brake is set firmly
or your vehicle may roll if it is
parked on an incline.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission making it
easier to move the shift lever out of
Park when you want to drive away.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the curb.
If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn
the front wheels toward the curb.
Make sure the parking brake is fully
released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or damage
the rear brakes.
Make sure the windows are closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Lock the doors and the tailgate
with the key or the remote
transmitter.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The three way catalytic
converter gets very hot, and could
cause these materials to catch on
fire.
Parking Tips
Parking
Driving
265
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the brake pads need replacing,
you will hear a distinctive metallic
‘‘screeching’’ sound when you apply
the brakes. If you do not have the
brake pads replaced, they will begin
screeching all the time.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by downshifting to a lower
gear and taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Since a
longer distance is needed to stop
with wet brakes, be extra cautious
and alert in your driving.
Your Honda is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps
you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
Put your foot on the brake pedal only
when you intend to brake. Resting
your foot on the pedal keeps the
brakes applied lightly, causing them
to build up heat. Heat build-up can
reduce how well your brakes work. It
also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
All four brakes have audible brake
wear indicators.
Your brakes may sometimes squeal
or squeak when you apply them
lightly. Do not confuse this with the
brake wear indicators. The
indicators make a very audible
‘‘screeching.’’
Brake Wear Indicators
Driving
The Braking System
266
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal; it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes.
this defeats the
purpose of the ABS. Let the ABS
work for you by always keeping firm,
steady pressure on the brake pedal
as you steer away from the hazard.
This is sometimes referred to as
Activation varies with the amount of
traction your tires have. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforeyou
activate the ABS. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
Your vehicle has an Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS) as standard
equipment. ABS helps to prevent the
wheels from locking up and skidding
during hard braking, allowing you to
retain steering control.
When the front tires skid, you lose
steering control; the vehicle
continues straight ahead even
though you turn the steering wheel.
The ABS helps to prevent lock-up
and helps you retain steering control
by pumping the brakes rapidly; much
faster than a person can do it.
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
The ABS also balances the front-to
rear braking distribution according
to vehicle loading.
‘‘stomp and steer.’’
CONTINUED
The Braking System
Driving
You should never pump the
brake pedal;
Anti-lock BrakesBrake System Design
267
Front
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock. Slow down and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe,
prudent speed for the road and
weather conditions.
it only helps with steering
control during braking. You should
always maintain a safe following
distance from other vehicles.
The ABS is self-checking. If anything
goes wrong, the ABS indicator on
the instrument panel comes on (see
page ). This means the anti-lock
function of the braking system has
shut down. The brakes still work like
a conventional system without anti-
lock, providing normal stopping
ability. You should have the dealer
inspect your vehicle as soon as
possible.
74
ABS IndicatorImportant Safety Reminders
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle,
The Braking System
Driving
268
ABS INDICATOR
U.S. indicator shown
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the front-to-rear braking
distribution system may also shut
down.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
Driving with TCS requires no special
skills or technique. The TCS does
not control your vehicle’s whole
braking system and cannot prevent
skidding if you enter a corner too
fast. It is still your responsibility to
drive at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
The TCS indicator will come on
alongwiththeABSindicatorifthere
is a problem with the anti-lock brake
system.
Your Honda is equipped with a
Traction Control System (TCS) to
assist you in maintaining traction
while driving slowly on loose or
slippery surfaces. The TCS assists
only in low-speed, low-traction
conditions; up to approximately 18
mph (30 km/h).
TCS monitors the speed of all four
wheels. When it senses a front wheel
losing traction, it applies braking to
that wheel. The TCS indicator
flashes when this occurs.
373
The Braking System, Traction Control System
Driving
Traction Control System
269
TRACTION CONTROL
SYSTEM INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When starting out or driving at low
speeds on a loose or slippery road
surface, you may notice that the
vehicle does not respond to the
accelerator in the same way it does
at other times. This is a sign TCS is
activating. You will see the TCS
indicator light flash.
You should still install winter tires on
your vehicle during the winter. Make
sure to use the same size originally
supplied with vehicle. Exercise the
samecautioninwinterdrivingasyou
would if your vehicle was not
equipped with TCS.
Driving with the compact spare tire
installed (see page ) may
activate the TCS. You should turn off
the system.
If the brakes overheat while TCS is
activating, the TCS indicator will
stop flashing and stay on temporarily.
This indicates that TCS has turned
off. After the brakes have cooled
down (usually for about 10 minutes),
TCSwillturnbackonandthe
indicator will turn off.
This switch is under the side vent. It
letsyouturntheTractionControl
System on and off. You cannot turn
off the TCS while the TCS indicator
light is flashing.
Deactivate the system by pressing
the TCS On/Off switch. The TCS
indicator light comes on as a
reminder. Pressing the switch again
turns the system back on.
352
Traction Control System
Driving
TCS ON/OFF Switch
270
TCS ON/OFF SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the TCS indicator comes on and
stays on for more than 10 minutes
while driving, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine, and watch the
TCS indicator. If the indicator
remains on, or comes back on while
driving, have the system inspected
by your Honda dealer. You can still
drive the vehicle without TCS.
This indicator will come on along
with the ABS indicator if there is a
problem in the anti-lock brake
system (see on page
).
The TCS indicator may occasionally
come on for one or two seconds and
then go out. This is normal.
The Traction Control System turns
on every time you start the engine,
even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
The TCS indicator comes on or
flashes under the following condi-
tions:
When you turn the ignition switch
to ON (II).
When you manually turn off TCS.
It flashes when TCS is regulating
wheelspin.
If the system’s diagnostics senses
a problem with TCS, the indicator
will come on and stay on.
If the brakes overheat, the
indicator will come on.
268
Traction Control System
Driving
ABS Indicator
TCS Indicator
271
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−Always drive
slower than you would in dry
weather. It takes your vehicle longer
to react, even in conditions that may
seem just barely damp. Apply
smooth, even pressure to all the
controls. Abrupt steering wheel
movements or sudden, hard appli-
cation of the brakes can cause loss of
control in wet weather. Be extra
cautious for the first few miles
(kilometers) of driving while you
adjust to the change in driving
conditions. This is especially true in
snow. A person can forget some
snow-driving techniques during the
summer months. Practice is needed
to relearn those skills.
Exercise extra caution when driving
in rain after a long dry spell. After
months of dry weather, the first
rains bring oil to the surface of the
roadway, making it slippery.
Rain, fog, and snow conditions re-
quire a different driving technique
because of reduced traction and
visibility. Keep your vehicle well-
maintained and exercise greater
caution when you need to drive in
bad weather. The cruise control
should not be used in these condi-
tions.
Being able to see
clearly in all directions and being
visible to other drivers are important
in all weather conditions. This is
more difficult in bad weather. To be
seen more clearly during daylight
hours, turn on your headlights.
Inspect your windshield wipers and
washers frequently. Keep the
windshield washer reservoir full of
the proper fluid. Have the windshield
wiper blades replaced if they start to
streak the windshield or leave parts
unwiped. Use the defroster and air
conditioning to keep the windows
from fogging up on the inside (see
pages and ).149 159/164
Driving
Driving in Bad Weather
Driving Technique Visibility
272
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− Check your tires
frequently for wear and proper
pressure. Both are important in
preventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss of
traction on a wet surface). In the
winter, mount snow tires on all four
wheels for the best handling.
Watch road conditions carefully,
they can change from moment to
moment. Wet leaves can be as slip-
pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can have
patches of ice. Driving conditions
can be very hazardous when the
outside temperature is near freezing.
The road surface can become
covered with areas of water puddles
mixed with areas of ice, so your
traction can change without warning.
Be careful when downshifting. If
traction is low, you can lock up the
drive wheels for a moment and cause
askid.
Be very cautious when passing, or
beingpassedbyothervehicles.The
spray from large vehicles reduces
your visibility, and the wind buffeting
can cause you to lose control.
Driving in Bad Weather
Driving
Traction
273
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Odyssey has been designed to
tow a trailer, as well as for carrying
passengers and their cargo.
To safely tow a trailer, you must
observe the load limits, use the
proper equipment, and follow the
guidelines in this section.
The
maximum weight you can tow
depends on several factors. See
page for limits for your towing
situation. Towing a load that is too
heavy can seriously affect your
vehicle’s handling and
performance.
275
Towing a Trailer
Driving
Load Limits
Total Trailer Weight:
274
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊＊
＊
＊＊
CONTINUED
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60 percent of the
load toward the front of the trailer
and 40 percent toward the rear, then
re-adjust the load as needed.
The weight that
the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
puts on the hitch should be
approximately 10 percent of the
trailer weight. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway. Too much
tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control.
Including driver. Based on 150 lbs (70 kg) per occupant.
Weight limited to avoid exceeding rear GAWR (see page ).
Number of Occupants
2
3
4
5
6
7
Maximum Total Trailer Weight
Equipped with transmission cooler
and power steering fluid cooler
3,500 lbs (1,580 kg)
3,350 lbs (1,520 kg)
3,200 lbs (1,450 kg)
3,050 lbs (1,380 kg)
2,900 lbs (1,310 kg)
650 lbs (295 kg)
:
:
276
Towing a Trailer
Driving
Tongue Load:
275
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The best way to confirm that vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits
is to have them checked at a public
scale.
Using a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge, check the tongue
load the first time you set up a
towing combination (a fully-loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo
and the tongue load is 5,665 lbs
(2,570 kg).
The maximum allowable weights
on the vehicle axles are 2,833 lbs
(1,285 kg) on the front axle, and
2,845 lbs (1,290 kg) on the rear
axle.
The maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle and trailer
is 8,265 lbs (3,750 kg) with the
proper hitch and fluid coolers.
(See page for information
about fluid coolers.)
277
Checking LoadsGross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR):
Towing a Trailer
Driving
276
Exceeding load limits or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously
injured or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, and
how much load you are towing.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in the rest of this section.
Also make sure that all equipment is
properly installed and that it meets
federal, state, province, and local
regulations.
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody,
using the six threaded holes
provided. A hitch and the required
fluid coolers designed especially for
your Odyssey can be obtained from
your Honda dealer.
If the total trailer weight is more
than 1,850 lbs (840 kg), you must
also use a weight distributing hitch.
This device transfers weight from
the vehicle’s rear wheels to the front
wheels, and to the trailer’s wheels.
Carefully follow the hitch maker’s
instructions for proper installation
and adjustment.
If the total trailer weight exceeds
2,000 lbs (900 kg), you should install
a sway control device to minimize
swaying that can occur in crosswinds
and in normal and emergency
driving maneuvers. Your trailer
maker can tell you what kind of sway
control you need and how to install it.
You must also have a transmission
fluid cooler and a power steering
fluid cooler installed. These coolers
are available only from your Honda
dealer.
Always use safety chains. Make sure
they are secured to both the trailer
and hitch, and that they cross under
the tongue so they can catch the
trailer if it becomes unhitched.
Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do
not let the chains drag on the ground.
CONTINUED
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Sway Control
Safety Chains
Weight Distributing Hitch
Hitches
Transmission Fluid Cooler and
Power Steering Fluid Cooler
Towing a Trailer
Driving
277
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Honda recommends that any trailer
having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more be equipped with
its own electric or surge-type brakes.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard. To use the trailer lighting connector,
you will need a wiring harness and
converter. This comes with the
Honda hitch (see page ), or it
may be obtained separately from
your dealer.
If you use a non-Honda trailer
lighting harness and converter, you
can get the connector and pins that
mate with the connector in your
vehicle from your Honda dealer.
All states and Canadian provinces
require some type of trailer lights.
Check requirements for the areas
where you plan to tow.
Your vehicle has a trailer lighting
connector located behind the left
side panel in the cargo area. Refer to
thedrawingaboveforthewiring
color code and purpose of each pin.
Seeyourtrailerdealerformore
information on installing electric
brakes. 277
Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights
Towing a Trailer
Driving
278
GROUND
(BLACK)
BACK-UP LIGHT
(GREEN/BLACK)
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
(GREEN/BLUE)
TAILLIGHT
(RED/BLACK)
BRAKE LIGHT
(WHITE/BLACK)
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
(GREEN/YELLOW)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, and cooling system
are in good operating condition.
If you tow frequently, follow the
Severe Conditions maintenance
schedule.
All weights and loads are within
limits (see pages and ).
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Askyourtrailersalesorrental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
Since lighting and wiring vary in
trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install
a suitable connector between the
vehicleandthetrailer.
When towing a trailer, you should
carry a full-size wheel and tire as a
spare in case you have a flat. If you
use the compact spare tire that came
with the vehicle, it may adversely
affect vehicle handling. See page
for information on proper tire
size, and page for information on
how to store a full-size tire. When
storing a full-size spare tire in the
trailer, follow the trailer maker’s
instructions.
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
328
359
274 276
Towing a Trailer
Driving
Pre-Tow Checklist
Additional Trailer Equipment
Spare Vehicle Tire
279
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D .
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
discussed below.
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use the D position when towing a
trailer on level roads. See ‘‘
’’ in the next column for
additional gear information. Do not
exceed 55 mph (88 km/h). At higher
speeds, the trailer may sway or
affect vehicle handling.
Allitemsonandinthetrailerare
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated (see page ),
and the trailer tires and spare are
inflated as recommended by the
trailer maker.
You may want to fill the fuel tank
with premium fuel. Premium fuel
provides improved performance.
323
3
Towing a Trailer
Driving
Making Turns and Braking
Driving on Hills
Towing Speeds and Gears
Driving on
Hills
Driving Safely With a Trailer
280
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including putting the
transmission in Park and firmly
setting the parking brake. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause trailer
swaying. When being passed by a
large vehicle, keep a constant speed
and steer straight ahead. Do not try
to make quick steering or braking
corrections.
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
andturnthewheelrighttomovethe
trailer to the right.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
placebypressingontheaccelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to 2nd
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember it will take longer to slow
downandstopwhentowingatrailer.
bottom
Towing a Trailer
Driving
ParkingHandling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Backing Up
281
Main Menu
Table of Contents
282
Main Menu
This section explains the importance
of keeping your vehicle well
maintained and why you should
follow basic maintenance safety
precautions.
If you have the skills and tools to per-
form more complex maintenance
tasks on your Honda, you may want
to purchase the Service Manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your Honda
dealer.
This section also includes
Maintenance Schedules for normal
driving and severe driving conditions,
a Maintenance Record, and instruc-
tions for simple maintenance tasks
you may want to take care of
yourself.
......................Maintenance Safety . 284
.Important Safety Precautions . 285
.................Maintenance Schedule . 286
...Required Maintenance Record . 293
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 295
..............................Fluid Locations . 296
......................................Engine Oil . 297
..................................Adding Oil . 297
....................Recommended Oil . 297
..............................Synthetic Oil . 298
....................................Additives . 299
.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 299
.............................Cooling System . 301
............Adding Engine Coolant . 301
.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 303
....................Windshield Washers . 306
....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 307
....................................Brake Fluid . 309
............................Brake System . 309
..............................Power Steering . 310
.....................Air Cleaner Element . 311
....................................Hood Latch . 313
....................................Spark Plugs . 313
..............................Replacement . 313
............................Specifications . 316
...........................................Battery . 317
.................................Wiper Blades . 319
..............Air Conditioning System . 321
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 322
.....................................Drive Belts . 322
....................................Timing Belt . 323
...............................................Tires . 323
......................................Inflation . 323
..................................Inspection . 325
..............................Maintenance . 326
.............................Tire Rotation . 326
...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 327
......................Wheels and Tires . 328
..........................Winter Driving . 328
.............................Snow Tires . 329
............................Tire Chains . 329
.............................................Lights . 330
.....................Headlight Aiming . 332
........................Replacing Bulbs . 332
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 341401
Maintenance
Maintenance
283
Main Menu
Regularly maintaining your vehicle is
the best way to protect your
investment. Proper maintenance is
essential to your safety and the
safety of your passengers. It will also
reward you with more economical,
trouble-free driving, and help reduce
air pollution.
This section includes instructions for
simple maintenance tasks, such as
checking and adding oil. Any service
items not detailed in this section
should be performed by a Honda
technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Maintenance Safety
Maintenance
284
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before you begin any maintenance,
make sure your vehicle is parked on
level ground and that the parking
brake is set. Also, be sure the engine
is off. This will help to eliminate
several potential hazards:
Be sure
there is adequate ventilation
whenever you operate the engine.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
before touching any parts.
Read the instructions before you
begin, and make sure you have the
tools and skills required.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, be careful when working
around gasoline or batteries. Use a
commercially available degreaser or
parts cleaner, not gasoline, to clean
parts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, and
flames away from the battery and all
fuel-related parts.
Do
not run the engine unless in-
structed to do so.
You should wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
near the battery or when using
compressed air.
Maintenance Safety
Maintenance
Important Safety Precautions
Carbon monoxide poisoning
from engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
Injury from moving parts.
285
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Maintenance Schedule specifies
how often you should have your
vehicle serviced and what things
need attention. It is essential that
you have your vehicle serviced as
scheduled to retain its high level of
safety, dependability, and emissions
control performance.
Service your vehicle according to the
time and mileage periods on one of
the Maintenance Schedules on the
following pages. Select the schedule
for ‘‘Severe Conditions’’ if most of
your driving is done under one or
more of the conditions listed on that
page. Otherwise, follow the schedule
for ‘‘Normal Conditions.’’The services and time or distance
intervals shown in the maintenance
schedule assume you will use your
vehicle as normal transportation for
passengers and their possessions.
You should also follow these
recommendations:
Avoid exceeding your vehicle’s
load limit. This puts excess stress
on the engine, brakes, and many
other parts of your vehicle. The
load limit is shown on the tire
information label on the driver’s
doorjamb.
Operate your vehicle on
reasonable roads within the legal
speed limit.
Drive your vehicle regularly over a
distance of several miles
(kilometers).
Always use unleaded gasoline with
theproperoctanerating(seepage
).244
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance
Which Schedule to Follow:
286
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＃
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Keep all the
receipts as proof of completion, and
have the person who does the work
fill out the Maintenance Record.
Check your warranty booklet for
more information.
U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, Honda
recommends that all maintenance
services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage
period to ensure long-term reliability.
We recommend the use of Honda
parts and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance
Maintenance, replacement or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
287
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＃
＃
＃
Follow the Normal Conditions
Maintenance Schedule if the
severe driving conditions
specified in the Severe
Conditions Maintenance
Schedule do not apply.
NOTE: If you only
drive under a
‘‘severe’’ condition, you should
follow the Normal Conditions
Maintenance Schedule.
Follow the Maintenance
Schedule for Severe Conditions.
OCCASIONALLY
Maintenance
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
288
Visually inspect the following items:
Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Service at the indicated
distance or time whichever
comes first.
miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km) or 5 years
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Cooling system hoses and connections
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
15
24
12
30
48
24
45
72
36
60
96
48
75
120
60
90
144
72
105
168
84
120
192
96
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil filter
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace air cleaner element
Inspect valve clearance
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt, and inspect water pump
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace transmission fluid
Inspect front and rear brakes
Replace brake fluid
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition
at least once per month)
Adjust only if noisy
: 287
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
□
□
□
□
□
□
□□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＃
＃
＃
Maintenance
289
A, B, C
Canadian Owners
U.S. Owners
A
B
C
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.
Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.
7,500 mi/12,000 km
15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr
22,500 mi/36,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
37,500 mi/60,000 km
3yrs
45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs
52,500 mi/84,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs
67,500 mi/108,000 km
75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs
82,500 mi/132,000 km
6yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs
97,500 mi/156,000 km
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs
112,500 mi/180,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs
9yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
then every 60,000 mi/
96,000 km/5 yrs
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)
Replace transmission fluid. Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A.
Replace transmission fluid. Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do items in A.
Replace timing belt, and inspect water pump.
Replace transmission fluid.
Inspect idle speed. Inspect valve clearance.
Replace spark plugs. Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)
Replace engine coolant
Replace engine oil.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 326 ).
Replace engine oil filter.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Check parking brake adjustment.
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
Inspect exhaust system .
Inspect fuel lines and connections .
Replace air cleaner element.
Inspect and adjust drive belts.
Replace dust and pollen filter.
•
•
290
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
NOTE:
:
287
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
＊
＊
＃
＃
＃
＊
＃＊
Follow the Severe Conditions
Maintenance Schedule if you
drive your vehicle
under one or more of the
following conditions:
Driving less than 5 miles (8
km) per trip or, in freezing
temperatures, driving less
than 10 miles (16 km) per trip.
Driving in extremely hot
[over 90°F (32°C)] conditions.
Extensive idling or long
periods of stop-and-go driving,
such as a taxi or a commercial
delivery vehicle.
Trailer towing, driving with a
roof rack, or driving in
mountainous conditions.
Driving on muddy, dusty, or
de-iced roads.
Follow the Maintenance
Schedule for Severe Conditions.
MAINLY
Maintenance
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
290
Visually inspect the following items:
Replace every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Service at the indicated
distance or time whichever
comes first.
miles x 1,000
km x 1,000
months
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km) or 5 years
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and conditions of fluids
Cooling system hoses and connections
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Lights and controls
Vehicle underbody
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
Inspect every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
30
48
24
60
96
48
90
144
72
120
192
96
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
15
24
12
45
72
36
75
120
60
105
168
84
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .
Refer to page for replacement
information under special driving
conditions.
Refer to page for replacement
information under special driving
conditions.
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace air cleaner element
Use normal schedule except in dusty
conditions
Inspect valve clearance
Replace spark plugs
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace transmission fluid
Inspect front and rear brakes
Replace brake fluid
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter
Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition
at least once per month)
Adjust only if noisy
1:
2:
: 287
322
323
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
,1
2
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＃
＃
＊
＊＃
＃
＊
＊
CONTINUED
Maintenance
291
A, B, C, D
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
A
B
C
D
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.
Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.
Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
3,750 mi/6,000 km
7,500 mi/12,000 km/6 mos
11,250 mi/18,000 km
15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr
18,750 mi/30,000 km
22,500 mi/36,000 km
26,250 mi/42,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
33,750 mi/54,000 km
37,500 mi/60,000 km
41,250 mi/66,000 km
3yrs
45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs
48,750 mi/78,000 km
52,500 mi/84,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs
63,750 mi/102,000 km
Replace engine oil and filter.
Inspect front and rear brakes.
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 326 ).
Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox and boots.
Inspect suspension components.
Inspect driveshaft boots.
Check parking brake adjustment.
Replace air cleaner element.
Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches with
multipurpose grease.
Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect fuel lines and connections.
Check all lights.
Inspect the underbody.
Replace transmission fluid.
Inspect and adjust drive belts.
Replace dust and pollen filter.
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Replace timing belt.
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Do item in A.
290
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.
See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving
conditions.
:
NOTE:
•
•
1:
2:
323
322
287
2
1,
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
□
＊＃
＊＃
＃
＊
＊
Maintenance
292
See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.
See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information
under special driving conditions.
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page .
:
1:
2:
NOTE:
287
323
322
67,500 mi/108,000 km
71,250 mi/114,000 km
75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs
78,750 mi/126,000 km
82,500 mi/132,000 km
86,250 mi/138,000 km
6yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs
93,750 mi/150,000 km
97,500 mi/156,000 km
101,250 mi/162,000 km
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs
108,750 mi/174,000 km
112,500 mi/180,000 km
116,250 mi/186,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs
9yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
then every 60,000 mi/
96,000 km/5 yrs
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)
DoitemsinA,B,C,D.
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump.
Inspect valve clearance.
Replace spark plugs.
Inspect idle speed.
DoitemsinA,B,C.
Do item in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do item in A.
Replace timing belt . Do items in A, B, C, D.
Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Replace engine coolant
•
•
1,
1,
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
293
3,750 mi
7,500 mi
11,250 mi
15,000 mi
18,750 mi
22,500 mi
26,250 mi
30,000 mi
33,750 mi
37,500 mi
41,250 mi
45,000 mi
48,750 mi
52,500 mi
56,250 mi
60,000 mi
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severe
conditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
6,000 km
12,000 km
18,000 km
24,000 km
(or 1 year)
30,000 km
36,000 km
42,000 km
48,000 km
(or 2 years)
54,000 km
60,000 km
66,000 km
72,000 km
(or 3 years)
78,000 km
84,000 km
90,000 km
96,000 km
(or 4 years)
290
288
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
294
63,750 mi
67,500 mi
71,250 mi
75,000 mi
78,750 mi
82,500 mi
86,250 mi
90,000 mi
93,750 mi
97,500 mi
101,250 mi
105,000 mi
108,750 mi
112,500 mi
116,250 mi
120,000 mi
Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
102,000 km
108,000 km
114,000 km
120,000 km
(or 5 years)
126,000 km
132,000 km
138,000 km
144,000 km
(or 6 years)
150,000 km
156,000 km
162,000 km
168,000 km
(or 7 years)
174,000 km
180,000 km
186,000 km
192,000 km
(or 8 years)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the page given.
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Windshield washer fluid Check
the level in the reservoir monthly.
If weather conditions cause you to
use the washers frequently, check
the reservoir each time you stop
for fuel. See page .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
turn signals, brake lights, and
license plate light monthly. See
page .
248
249
306
307
309
323
330
Owner Maintenance Checks
Maintenance
295
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fluid Locations
Maintenance
296
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To add oil, unscrew and remove the
engine oil fill cap on top of the valve
cover. Pour in the oil, and install the
engine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.
Wait a few minutes and recheck the
oil level. Do not fill above the upper
mark; you could damage the engine.
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
genuine Honda Motor Oil in your
vehicle for optimum engine
protection.
Pour the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
CONTINUED
Adding Oil Recommended Oil
Engine Oil
Maintenance
297
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight as shown
on the chart. When using synthetic
oil, you must follow the oil and filter
change intervals given in the
maintenance schedule.
The oil’s viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
Select the oil for your vehicle
according to this chart.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your Honda, to
improve cold weather starting, and
to help your engine use less fuel.
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
Synthetic Oil
Engine Oil
Maintenance
298
Ambient Temperature
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always change the oil and filter
accordingtothetimeanddistance
(miles/kilometers) recommenda-
tions in the maintenance schedule.
The oil and filter collect contami-
nants that can damage your engine if
they are not removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Open the hood and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Your Honda does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect your engine’s or transmission’s
performance and durability.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Additives Changing the Oil and Filter
Engine Oil
Maintenance
299
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the oil filter and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
Honda dealer) is required to
remove the filter.
Install a new oil filter according to
instructions that come with it.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten it to:
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator light should go out within
five seconds. If it does not, turn off
the engine and reinspect your
work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level. If necessary, add oil to bring
the level to the upper mark on the
dipstick.
9.
8.
7.
6.
4.
5.
3.
Engine Oil
Maintenance
300
OIL FILTER
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
4.6 US qt (4.4
, 3.9 Imp qt)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmful to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
The coolant you add should always
be a mixture of 50 percent antifreeze
and 50 percent water. Never add
straight antifreeze or plain water.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Always use Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water. It
does not require any additional
mixing.
If it is not available, you may use
another major-brand non-silicate
coolant as a temporary replacement.
Make sure it is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
However, continued use of any non-
Honda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling
system to malfunction or fail. Have
the cooling system flushed and
refilled with Honda antifreeze/
coolant as soon as possible.
CONTINUED
Adding Engine Coolant
Cooling System
Maintenance
301
RESERVE TANK
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
Turn the radiator cap counter-
clockwise, without pressing down
on it, until it stops. This relieves
any pressure remaining in the
cooling system.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Put the radiator cap back on.
Tighten it fully.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
Pour the coolant slowly and carefully
so you do not spill. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled coolant
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
Cooling System
Maintenance
302
RADIATOR CAP
RESERVE TANK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Thecoolingsystemshouldbe
completely drained and refilled with
new coolant according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. Only use
Honda All Season Antifreeze/
Coolant Type 2.
Draining the coolant requires access
to the underside of the vehicle.
Unless you have the tools and
knowledge, you should have this
maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Turn the ignition ON (II). Turn
the heater temperature control
dial fully clockwise or set the
climate control system to
90°F (32°C). Turn the ignition off.
Openthehood.Makesurethe
engine and radiator are cool to the
touch.
Remove the radiator cap.
Loosen the drain plug on the
bottom of the radiator. The
coolant will drain through the
splash guard. Drain the coolant
into an appropriate container.
1. 3.
2.
Replacing Engine Coolant
Cooling System
Maintenance
303
DRAIN PLUG
DRAIN BOLT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the coolant stops draining,
tightenthedrainplugatthe
bottom of the radiator.
Tighten the drain bolt at the rear
of the engine cylinder block
securely.
Tightening torque:
Remove the reserve tank from its
holder by pulling it straight up.
Drain the coolant into an
appropriate container, then put the
tank back in its holder.
Install a rubber hose on the drain
bolt in the back of the engine
block. Loosen the drain bolt. Drain
the coolant into an appropriate
container.
6.
4. 5.
7.
Cooling System
Maintenance
304
RESERVE TANK RESERVE
TANK CAP
HOLDER
7 lbf·ft (10 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fill the reserve tank to the MAX
mark. Install the reserve tank cap.
Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it to the first stop.
Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator cooling fan comes on
at least twice. Then stop the
engine.
Remove the radiator cap. Fill the
radiator with coolant up to the
base of the filler neck.
Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it fully.
Pour Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into
the radiator up to the base of the
filler neck. This coolant is a
mixture of 50 percent antifreeze
and 50 percent water. Pre-mixing
is not required.
The cooling system capacity is:
8.
10.
11.
12.
13.
9.
Cooling System
Maintenance
305
FILLER NECK
Fill up to here
1.98 US gal (7.5 , 1.65 Imp gal)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
Check the level in the windshield
washer reservoir at least monthly
duringnormaluse.Inbadweather,
when you use the washers often,
check the level every time you stop
for fuel. This reservoir supplies the
windshield and rear window washers.
The windshield washer reservoir is
located behind the passenger’s side
headlight.
Check the reservoir’s fluid level by
removing the cap and looking at the
level gauge attached to the cap.
The low washer level indicator will
light when the level is low (see page
).77
On Canadian models
Windshield Washers
Maintenance
306
LEVEL GAUGE
Do not use engine antifreeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s
paint, while a vinegar/water solution
can damage the windshield washer
pump.
Use only commercially-available
windshield washer fluid.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Shut off the engine.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission as shown.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
1.
2. 3.
4.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
Automatic Transmission Fluid
307
DIPSTICK
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To thoroughly flush the transmission,
the technician should drain and refill
it with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive the
vehicle a short distance. Do this
three times. Then drain and refill the
transmission a final time.
If the level is below the lower
mark, remove the fill plug and add
fluid to bring it to the upper mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill. Clean up any
spills immediately. Spilled fluid
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your Honda dealer.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If
it is not available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect shift quality. Have
the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
soon as it is convenient.
5.
6.
Maintenance
Automatic Transmission Fluid
308
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement. However, the use of
any non-Honda brake fluid can cause
corrosion and decrease the life of the
system. Have the brake system
flushed and refilled with Honda
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as
soon as possible.
Check the fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir monthly.
The brake fluid should be replaced
according to the time recommenda-
tion in the maintenance schedule.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled fluid could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
Brake System
Maintenance
Brake Fluid
309
MAX
MIN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. If it is not available, you may
use another power steering fluid as
an emergency replacement.
However, continued use can cause
increased wear and poor steering in
cold weather. Have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Check the level when the engine is
cold. Look at the side of the
reservoir. The fluid should be
between the UPPER LEVEL and
LOWER LEVEL. If it is below the
LOWER LEVEL, add power steering
fluid to the UPPER LEVEL.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled fluid could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Power Steering
Maintenance
310
UPPER LEVEL
LOWER LEVEL
Turning the steering wheel to full left
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To replace it:
Remove the two pins holding the
air intake cover by pulling the
head on each pin. Remove the air
intake cover.
The air cleaner element is inside the
air cleaner housing on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment.
Loosen the four bolts by using a
Phillips-head screwdriver.
The air cleaner element should be
replaced according to the time and
distance recommendations in the
maintenance schedule.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Replacement
Air Cleaner Element
Maintenance
311
AIR
INTAKE
COVER
BOLTS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the air cleaner housing
cover.
Remove the old air cleaner
element.
Carefully clean the inside of the
air cleaner housing with a damp
rag.
The coolant lines inside the air
cleaner housing may be warm.
Place the new air cleaner element
in the air cleaner housing.
Reinstall the air cleaner housing
cover, and tighten the four bolts.
Reinstall the air intake cover.
Reinstall the two pins and secure
thembypushingontheheads
until they lock.
3.
4.
6.
7.
5. 8.
Maintenance
Air Cleaner Element
312
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The spark plugs in your vehicle are a
special platinum-tipped design for
longer life. The spark plugs should
be replaced according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule.
Clean the hood latch assembly with a
mild cleaner, then lubricate it with a
multipurpose grease. Lubricate all
the moving parts (as shown),
including the pivot. Follow the time
and distance recommendations in
the Maintenance Schedule. If you
are not sure how to clean and grease
the latch, contact your Honda dealer.
Loosen the four bolts with a
wrench, then remove the engine
cover.
1.
CONTINUED
Hood Latch Spark Plugs
Hood Latch, Spark Plugs
Maintenance
Replacement
313
LATCH ASSEMBLY
BOLTS
ENGINE
COVER
BOLTS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Loosen the two holding clips by
turning the heads one-quarter turn
counterclockwise with a flat-tipped
screwdriver. Remove the cover on
the front cylinder bank by pulling
it straight up.
Clean off any dirt and oil that have
collected around the ignition coils.
Disconnect the wire connector
from the ignition coil by pushing
on the lock tab and pulling on the
connector. Pull on the plastic
connector, not the wires.
Use a wrench to remove the
hexagonsocketheadcapbolt
holding the ignition coil. Remove
the ignition coil by pulling it
straight out.
Remove the spark plug with
a five-eighths inch (16 mm) spark
plug socket.
5.
6.
4.2.
3.
Maintenance
Spark Plugs
314
HEXAGON SOCKET HEAD CAP BOLT
HOLDING CLIP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Torque the spark plug. (If you do
not have a torque wrench, tighten
the spark plug two-thirds of a turn
after it contacts the cylinder head.)
Tightening torque:
Put the new spark plug into the
socket, then screw it into the hole.
Screw it in by hand so you do not
crossthread it.
8.7.
CONTINUED
Spark Plugs
Maintenance
315
13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)
Tighten the spark plugs carefully. A
spark plug that is too loose can
overheat and damage the engine.
Overtightening can cause damage to
the threads in the cylinder head.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
−
Install the ignition coil. Reinstall
the hexagon socket head cap bolt.
Push the wire connector onto the
ignition coil. Make sure it locks in
place.
Repeat this procedure for the
other five spark plugs.
Reinstall the cover on the front
cylinder bank while putting its
mounting clip in the hole on the
passenger’s side. Secure the cover
by turning the heads of the two
holding clips one-quarter turn
clockwise with a flat-tipped
screwdriver.
Spark Plug Gap:
Reinstall the engine cover and
tighten the four bolts securely.
NGK:
DENSO:
9.
11.
10.
12.
13.
Spark Plugs
Maintenance
Specifications:
316
PZFR5F-11
PKJ16CR-L11
0.04 in (1.1 mm)
0
0.1 mm
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Check the condition of your vehicle’s
battery monthly. You should check
the color of the test indicator window,
and for corrosion on the terminals.
Check the battery terminals for
corrosion (a white or yellowish
powder). To remove it, cover the
terminals with a solution of baking
soda and water. It will bubble up and
turn brown. When this stops, wash it
off with plain water. Dry off the
battery with a cloth or paper towel.
Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
If the terminals are severely cor-
roded, clean them with baking soda
and water. Then use a wrench to
loosen and remove the cables from
the terminals. Always disconnect the
negative ( ) cable first and recon-
nect it last. Clean the battery termi-
nals with a terminal cleaning tool or
wire brush. Reconnect and tighten
the cables, then coat the terminals
with grease.
Check the battery condition by
looking at the test indicator window
on the battery.
The label on the battery explains the
test indicator’s colors.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
CONTINUED
Battery
Maintenance
WARNING:
Wash hands after handling.
317
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damage to the vehicle’s
electrical system.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, the
AUTO feature of the driver’s window
will be disabled. You should reset the
AUTOfeature(seepage ).126
Battery
Maintenance
318
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
Charging the battery with the cables
connected can seriously damage your
vehicle’s electronic controls. Detach
the battery cables before connecting
the batteryto a charger.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
Disconnect the blade assembly
fromthewiperarmbypushingin
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield.
To replace a wiper blade:
Front windshield: Raise the driver’s
side first, then the passenger’s
side.
2.
1.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
319
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and the arms.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal rein-
forcement along the back edge,
remove the metal reinforcement
strips from the old wiper blade and
install them in the slots along the
edge of the new blade.
Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Front windshield: Lower the
passenger’s side first, then the
driver’s side.
6.
7.
4.
5.
3.
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
320
BLADE
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Run the air conditioning at least once
a week during the cold weather
months. Run it for at least ten
minutes while you are driving at a
steady speed with the engine at
normal operating temperature. This
circulates the lubricating oil con-
tained in the refrigerant.
If the air conditioning does not get as
cold as before, have your dealer
check the system. Recharge the
system with Refrigerant HFC-134a
(R-134a). (See Specifications on page
.)
Your vehicle’s air conditioning is a
sealed system. Any major mainte-
nance, such as recharging, should be
done by a qualified mechanic. You
can do a couple of things to make
sure the air conditioning works
efficiently.
Periodically check the engine’s
radiator and air conditioning
condenser for leaves, insects, and
dirt stuck to the front surface. These
block the air flow and reduce cooling
efficiency. Use a light spray from a
hose or a soft brush to remove them.
386
Maintenance
Air Conditioning System
321
AIR CONDITIONING
CONDENSER
Whenever you have the air conditioning
system serviced, make sure the service
facility uses a refrigerant recycling
system. This system captures the
refrigerant for reuse. Releasing
refrigerant into the atmosphere can
damage the environment.
The condenser and radiator fins bend
easily. Only use a low-pressure spray
or soft-bristle brush to clean them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
Check the condition of the two drive
belts (power steering belt and
alternator belt). Examine the edges
of each belt for cracks or fraying.
If you see signs of wear or looseness,
have your dealer adjust or replace
the belts.
Power steering belt:
Thebeltshouldhavethefollowing
‘‘play’’ or deflection.
Check the tension of the power
steering belt by pushing on it with
your thumb midway between the
pulleys.
The dust and pollen filter removes
pollen and dust that is brought in
from the outside through the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system.
This filter should be replaced every
30,000 miles (48,000 km) under
normal conditions. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles. Replace it
more often if air flow from the
heating and cooling system/climate
control system becomes less than
usual. Have the dust and pollen filter
replaced by your Honda dealer.
Drive BeltsDust and Pollen Filter
Maintenance
Dust and Pollen Filter, Drive Belts
322
POWER STEERING BELT
ALTERNATOR BELT
0.51 0.65 in (13.0 16.5 mm)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−− We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated. The
following pages give more detailed
informationonhowandwhento
check air pressure, how to inspect
your tires for damage and wear, and
what to do when your tires need to
be replaced.
The timing belt should normally be
replaced at the intervals shown in
the maintenance schedule.
Replace the belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)
or 100,000 km (Canada) if you regu-
larly drive your vehicle in one or
more of these conditions:
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C).
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort. Underinflated tires wear
unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,aremore
prone to damage from road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
CONTINUED
Timing Belt, Tires
Maintenance
InflationTiresTiming Belt
323
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions and
speeds. Tire pressures for high
speed driving are the same as for
normal driving.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
If you check the pressure when the
tires are hot (the vehicle has been
driven several miles), you will see
readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3
to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold
pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure at least once a month. Even
tires that are in good condition may
lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1
to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.
Remember to check the spare tire at
thesametimeyoucheckallthe
other tires.
Check the pressure in the tires when
they are cold. This means the vehicle
has been parked for at least three
hours. If you have to drive the
vehicle before checking the tire
pressure, the tires can still be
considered ‘‘cold’’ if you drive less
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Tires
Maintenance
Recommended Tire Pressures for
Normal Driving
324
225/60R16 98T 36 psi (250 kPa , 2.5
kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s tires have wear indica-
tors molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down to that point, you
will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide
band running across the tread. This
shows there is less than 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. A
tire that is this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see the
tread wear indicator in three or more
places around the tire.
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
These pressures are also given on
thetireinformationlabelonthe
driver’s doorjamb.
Tubeless tires have some ability to
self-seal if they are punctured.
However, because leakage is often
very slow, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
Inspection
Tires
Maintenance
325
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, you
should have the tires rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
chart each time they are rotated.
Make sure the installer balances the
wheels when you have new tires
installed. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. Your vehicle’s
original tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’
balanced at the factory. For best
results, have the installer perform a
dynamic balance.
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
The tires were properly balanced by
the factory. They may need to be
rebalanced at some time before they
are worn out. Have your dealer
check the tires if you feel a consis-
tent vibration while driving. A tire
should always be rebalanced if it is
removed from the wheel for repair.
On some models
Tires
Maintenance
Tire RotationMaintenance
326
Front Front
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only genuine Honda wheel weights for
balancing.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, then replace the two
front tires or the two rear tires as a
pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s han-
dling.
When shopping for replacement
tires, you may find that some tires
are ‘‘directional.’’ This means they
are designed to rotate only in one
direction. If you use directional tires,
they should be rotated only front-to-
back.
The tires that came with your
vehicle were selected to match the
performance capabilities of the
vehicle while providing the best
combination of handling, ride
comfort,andlonglife.Youshould
replace them with radial tires of the
same size, load range, speed rating,
and maximum cold tire pressure
rating (as shown on the tire’s
sidewall). Mixing radial and bias-ply
tires on your vehicle can reduce its
braking ability, traction, and steering
accuracy.
Tires
Maintenance
Replacing Tires and Wheels
327
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or
‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have an
all-weather tread design. They
should be suitable for most winter
driving conditions. Tires without
these markings are designed for
optimum traction in dry conditions.
They may not provide adequate
performance in winter driving.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
TheABSworksbycomparingthe
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
work inconsistently.
If you ever need to replace a wheel,
make sure the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheel
that came on your vehicle. Re-
placement wheels are available at
your Honda dealer.
Wheel:
Tire:
See page for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading.
388
Winter DrivingWheels and Tires
Tires
Maintenance
328
16x61/2JJ
225/60R16 98T
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you mount snow tires on your
Honda, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tiresonallfourwheelstobalance
your vehicle’s handling in all weather
conditions. Keep in mind the traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may not be as high as your vehicle’s
original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads
areclear.Checkwiththetiredealer
for maximum speed recommenda-
tions.
Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not
be used. No matter how tight they
seem to be installed, they can come
into contact with the body and
suspension, causing serious damage.
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with them installed. If
youhearthemcomingincontact
with the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Make sure the cables are
installed tightly, and that they are
not contacting the brake lines or
suspension. Remove them as soon as
you begin driving on cleared roads.
Because your Honda has limited tire
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’
cable-type traction devices on the
front tires. Use traction devices only
when required by driving conditions
or local laws. Make sure they are the
correct size for your tires.
Snow Tires Tire Chains
Tires
Maintenance
329
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the operation of your vehicle’s
exterior lights at least once a month.
A burned out bulb can create an
unsafe condition by reducing your
vehicle’s visibility and the ability to
signal your intentions to other
drivers.
Lights
Maintenance
330
HEADLIGHT TURN SIGNAL/
SIDE MARKER/
PARKING LIGHTS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the following:
Headlights (low and high beam)
Parking lights
Taillights
Brake lights
High-mount brake light
Turn signals
Back-up lights
Hazard light function
License plate light
Side marker lights
Daytime running lights
(Canadian models)
If you find any bulbs are burned out,
replace them as soon as possible.
Refer to the chart on page to
determine what type of replacement
bulb is needed.
387
Lights
Maintenance
331
STOP/TAILLIGHTS/
SIDE MARKER LIGHTS
TAILLIGHT HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
BACK-UP LIGHT
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Unclip the end of the hold-down
wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
the way and remove the bulb.
Remove the rubber weather seal
by pulling on the tab.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pulling the
connector straight back.
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs, one on each side. When
replacing a bulb, handle it by its steel
base and protect the glass from
contactwithyourskinorhard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
Open the hood.
If you need to change the head-
light bulb on the driver’s side,
remove the air intake cover (see
page ).
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
cargo area or pull a trailer,
readjustment may be required.
Adjustment of the headlights should
be performed by a Honda technician
or other qualified mechanic.
1.
2.
3.
4.
311
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing a Headlight BulbHeadlight Aiming
332
HOLD-DOWN WIRE WEATHER
SEAL
BULB
CONNECTOR
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
If you are changing the bulb on
the driver’s side, start the engine,
turn the steering wheel all the way
to the right, and turn off the
engine. If you are changing the
bulb on the passenger’s side, turn
the steering wheel to the left.
Insert the new bulb into the hole,
making sure the tabs are in their
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place and clip the end into
the slot.
Install the rubber seal over the
back of the headlight assembly.
Make sure it is right side up; it is
marked ‘‘TOP.’’
Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb. Make sure it is
connected securely.
Reinstall the air intake cover.
(Driver’s side)
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
1. 2.
3.
5.
6.
7.
8.
CONTINUED
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing the Front Side Marker/
Turn Signal and Parking Light
Bulb
333
HOLDING CLIP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Remove the burned out bulb from
thesocketbypushingitinand
turning the bulb counterclockwise
until it unlocks.
Install the new bulb in the socket.
Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Put the inner fender in place.
Install the two holding clips. Lock
each clip in place by pushing on
the center.
Determine which of the two bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight/side
marker light or turn signal light.
Pull the taillight assembly out of
thebodybyslidingitbackward.
Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the taillight assembly
mounting screw under each cover.
Open the tailgate. Release the
covers by inserting a flat-tip
screwdriver into the slot until the
cover bows slightly. Then pivot
the screwdriver 90° and pull it
straight out of the slot.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
1.
2.
3.
4.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing Rear Bulbs
(in Fenders)
334
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
When reinstalling the taillight
assembly, align and pop the snap
fasteners in place. Tighten the two
mounting screws and reinstall the
covers in place.
Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
the edge of the taillight cover.
Remove it by carefully prying in
the notch on its edge with a small
flat-tipped screwdriver.
Determine which of the two bulbs
is burned out: taillight or back-up
light.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
2.
3.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9. 1.
CONTINUED
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing Rear Bulbs
(in Tailgate)
335
TAILLIGHT COVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Insert the socket back into the
light assembly. Turn it clockwise
to lock it in place.
Reinstall the taillight cover.
Pull the light assembly out of the
tailgate.
Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Place a cloth on the edge of the
lens segment on the passenger’s
side. Remove that lens segment by
carefully prying on its edge with a
small flat-tipped screwdriver.
Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the screw under the lens.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
4.
5.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
336
SCREW
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Put the socket back into the light
assembly and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.
Remove the license light assembly
by carefully prying on the left
edge of the lens with a flat-tip
screwdriver and pulling the
assembly out.
Remove the lens from the bulb
holder by pulling the lens while
squeezing the tabs on both sides
of the holder.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb in until
it bottoms in the socket.
Put the light assembly back into
the tailgate. Install the screw and
tighten it securely. Reinstall the
lens segment.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
2.
3.
6.
7.
8.
1.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing a Rear License Plate
Bulb
337
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn on the parking lights and
check that the new bulb is
working.
Put the lens back on the bulb
holder and push it until it latches.
Slide the left side of the light
assembly into the hole. Push on
the right side to latch the
assembly into place.
The individual map lights, cargo area
light, and the vanity mirror lights
come apart the same way. They do
not all use the same type of bulbs.
Removethelensbycarefully
prying on the edge of the lens with
a fingernail file or a small flat-tip
screwdriver. Do not pry on the
edge of the housing around the
lens.
1.
4.
5.
6.
Lights
Maintenance
Replacing Bulbs in the Interior
Lights
338
FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its metal tabs.
Push the new bulb into the metal
tabs. Snap the lens back in place.
Front individual map light:
Pry on the front edge in front of both
map lights.
Rear individual map light:
Pry on the middle edge of the lens
near the vent.
Cargo area light:
Pry on the rear edge to the left and
right of center.
3.2.
CONTINUED
Lights
Maintenance
339
REAR INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHT
CARGO AREA LIGHT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
Maintenance
340
SUN VISOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than one
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter
(see page ).
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc. are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
Support the front and rear wiper
blade arms with a folded towel or
ragsotheydonottouchthe
windshield.
Disconnect the battery.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Nonporous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, run the engine for a
while periodically (preferably once
amonth).
If you store your vehicle for 12
months or longer, have your Honda
dealer perform the inspections called
for in the 24 months/30,000 miles
(48,000 km) maintenance schedule
(Normal Conditions) as soon as you
take it out of storage (see page ).
The replacements called for in the
maintenance schedule are not
needed unless the vehicle has
actually reached that time or mileage.
299
288
Storing Your Vehicle
Maintenance
341
Main Menu
Table of Contents
342
Main Menu
Regular cleaning and polishing of
your Honda helps to keep it ‘‘new’’
looking. This section gives you
informationonhowtocleanyour
vehicle and preserve its appearance:
the paint, brightwork, wheels and
interior. Also included are several
things you can do to help prevent
corrosion.
.................................Exterior Care . 344
.....................................Washing . 344
.......................................Waxing . 345
....................Aluminum Wheels . 345
..........................Paint Touch-up . 345
..................................Interior Care . 346
...................................Carpeting . 346
..................................Floor mats . 346
.........................................Fabric . 347
...........................................Vinyl . 347
.......................................Leather . 347
...................................Seat Belts . 347
....................................Windows . 348
..........................Air Fresheners . 348
....................Corrosion Protection . 349
.................................Body Repairs . 350
Appearance Care
Appearance Care
343
Main Menu
Frequent washing helps preserve
your vehicle’s beauty. Dirt and grit
can scratch the paint, while tree sap
and bird droppings can permanently
ruin the finish.
Wash your vehicle in a shady area,
not in direct sunlight. If the vehicle is
parked in the sun, move it into the
shade and let the exterior cool down
before you start.
When you have washed and rinsed
the whole exterior, dry it with a
chamois or soft towel. Letting it
air-dry will cause dulling and water
spots.
As you dry the vehicle, inspect it for
chips and scratches that could allow
corrosion to start. Repair them with
touch-up paint (see page ).
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with
cool water to remove loose dirt.
Only use the solvents and cleaners
recommendedinthisOwner’s
Manual.
Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix
in a mild detergent, such as
dishwashing liquid or a product
made especially for car washing.
Wash the vehicle using the water
and detergent solution and a soft-
bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.
Start at the top and work your way
down. Rinse frequently.
Check the body for road tar, tree
sap, etc. Remove these stains with
tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it
off immediately so it does not
harm the finish. Remember to re-
wax these areas, even if the rest of
the vehicle does not need waxing.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
antenna on the front right fender.
Before using a ‘‘drive-through’’ car
wash, make sure you remove the
antenna by unscrewing it by hand.
This prevents the antenna from
being damaged by the car wash
brushes.
345
Exterior Care
Appearance Care
Washing
344
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners
can damage the paint, metal, and
plastic on your vehicle.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Your dealer has touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. The color
code is printed on a sticker on the
driver’s doorjamb. Take this code to
your dealer so you are sure to get
the correct color.
Inspect your vehicle frequently for
chips or scratches in the paint.
Repair them right away to prevent
corrosion of the metal underneath.
Use the touch-up paint only on small
chips and scratches. More extensive
paint damage should be repaired by
a professional.
Always wash and dry the whole
vehiclebeforewaxingit.Youshould
wax your vehicle, including the metal
trim, whenever water sits on the
surface in large patches. It should
formintobeadsordropletsafter
waxing.
The wheels have a protective clear-
coat that keeps the aluminum from
corroding and tarnishing. Using
harsh chemicals, including some
commercial wheel cleaners, or stiff
brushes can damage this clear-coat.
Only use a mild detergent and soft
brush or sponge to clean the wheels.
Clean your Honda’s aluminum alloy
wheels as you do the rest of the
exterior.Washthemwiththesame
solution, and rinse them thoroughly.
Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with
removers also takes off the wax.
Remember to re-wax those areas,
even if the rest of the vehicle does
not need waxing.
Polishes Polishes and cleaner/
waxes can restore the shine to paint
that has oxidized and lost some of its
shine. They normally contain mild
abrasives and solvents that remove
the top layer of the finish. You
should use a polish on your Honda if
the finish does not have its original
shine after using a wax.
Waxes A wax coats the finish and
protects it from damage by exposure
to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You
should use a wax on your Honda
when it is new.
You should use a quality liquid or
paste wax. Apply it according to the
instructions on the container. In
general, there are two types of
products:
On some models
Exterior Care
Appearance Care
Paint Touch-upWaxing
Aluminum Wheels
345
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vacuum the carpeting frequently to
remove dirt. Ground-in dirt will make
the carpet wear out faster.
Periodically shampoo the carpet to
keep it looking new. Use one of the
foam-type carpet cleaners on the
market. Follow the instructions that
come with the cleaner, applying it
with a sponge or soft brush. Keep
the carpeting as dry as possible by
not adding water to the foam.
If you remove the driver’s floor mat,
make sure to re-anchor it when you
putitbackinyourvehicle.
If you replace it, use a Honda floor
matthatisdesignedtobeusedwith
the floor mat anchors in your vehicle.
If you use a non-Honda floor mat in
the driver’s footwell, make sure it
fits properly and that it can be used
with the floor mat anchor.
Do not put additional floor mats on
top of the anchored mat, otherwise
the additional mats may slide
forward and interfere with the pedals.
The Honda driver’s floor mat that
came with your vehicle was designed
to be hooked over the floor mat
anchor. This keeps the floor mat
from sliding forward and possibly
interfering with the pedals.
Carpeting Floor Mats
Interior Care
Appearance Care
346
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum
cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft
cloth dampened in a solution of mild
soap and water. Use the same
solution with a soft-bristle brush on
more difficult spots. You can also use
commercially-available spray or
foam-type vinyl cleaners.
Vacuum dirt and dust out of the
material frequently. For general
cleaning, use a solution of mild soap
and lukewarm water, letting it air dry.
To clean off stubborn spots, use a
commercially-available fabric cleaner.
Test it on a hidden area of the fabric
first, to make sure it does not bleach
or stain the fabric. Follow the
instructions that come with the
cleaner.
If your seat belts get dirty, you can
use a soft brush with a mixture of
mild soap and warm water to clean
them. Do not use bleach, dye, or
cleaning solvents. They can weaken
the belt material. Let the belts air-
drybeforeyouusethevehicle.
Vacuum dirt and dust from the
leather frequently. Pay particular
attention to the pleats and seams.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth
dampened with clear water, then
buff it with a clean, dry cloth. If
further cleaning is needed, use a
soap specifically for leather, such as
saddle soap. Apply this soap with a
damp,softcloth.Wipedownand
buff as described above.
CONTINUED
On EX-L model
Interior Care
Appearance Care
Fabric
Vinyl
Seat BeltsLeather
347
LOOP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Ifyouusealiquidairfreshener,
make sure you fasten it securely so it
does not spill as you drive.
If you want to use an air freshener/
deodorizer in the interior of your
vehicle, it is best to use a solid type.
Some liquid air fresheners contain
chemicals that may cause parts of
the interior trim and fabric to crack
or discolor.
Clean the windows, inside and out,
with a commercially-available glass
cleaner. You can also use a mixture
of one part white vinegar to ten parts
water. This will remove the haze that
builds up on the inside of the
windows. Use a soft cloth or paper
towels to clean all glass and clear
plastic surfaces.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Interior Care
Appearance Care
Air FreshenersWindows
348
The rear window defogger wires are
bonded to the inside of the glass.
Wiping vigorously up-and-down can
dislodge and break the defogger wires.
When cleaning the rear window, use
gentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Two factors normally contribute to
causing corrosion in your vehicle:
Moisture trapped in body cavities.
Dirtandroadsaltthatcollectsin
hollows on the underside of the
vehicle stays damp, promoting
corrosion in that area.
Removal of paint and protective
coatings from the exterior and
underside of the vehicle.
Repair chips and scratches in the
paint as soon as you discover them.
Many corrosion-preventive measures
are built into your Honda. You can
help keep your vehicle from
corroding by performing some
simple periodic maintenance:
Inspect and clean out the drain
holes in the bottom of the doors
and body.
Check the floor coverings for
dampness. Carpeting and floor
mats may remain damp for a long
time, especially in winter. This
dampness can eventually cause
the floor panels to corrode.
Use a high-pressure spray to clean
the underside of your vehicle. This
is especially important in areas
that use road salt in winter. It is
also a good idea in humid climates
and areas subject to salt air. Be
careful of the ABS wheel sensors
and wiring at each wheel.
Have the corrosion-preventive
coatings on the underside of your
vehicle inspected and repaired
periodically.
1.
2.
Corrosion Protection
Appearance Care
349
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Body repairs can affect your vehicle’s
resistance to corrosion. If your
vehicle needs repairs after a collision,
pay close attention to the parts used
in the repair and the quality of the
work.
Make sure the repair facility uses
Honda replacement body parts.
Some companies make sheet metal
pieces that seem to duplicate the
original Honda body parts, but are
actually inferior in fit, finish, and
corrosion resistance. Once installed,
they do not give the same high-
quality appearance.
When reporting your collision to the
insurance company, tell them you
want Honda parts used in the repair.
Although most insurers recognize
the quality of original parts, some
maytrytospecifythattherepairsbe
done with other available parts. You
should investigate this before any
repairs have begun.
Take your vehicle to your authorized
Honda dealer for inspection after the
repairs are completed. Your dealer
can make sure that quality materials
were used, and that corrosion-
preventive coatings were applied to
all repaired and replaced parts.
Body Repairs
Appearance Care
350
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section covers the more-
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 352
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 353
..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 362
Nothing Happens or the
Starter Motor Operates
........................Very Slowly . 362
The Starter Operates
................................Normally . 363
................................Jump Starting . 364
............If Your Engine Overheats . 366
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 369
..........Charging System Indicator . 370
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 371
.......................Readiness Codes . 372
...............Brake System Indicator . 373
..............................................Fuses . 374
..........Checking and Replacing . 375
......................Emergency Towing . 380
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
351
Main Menu
Your vehicle has a compact spare
tire that takes up less space. Use this
sparetireasatemporaryreplace-
ment only. Get your regular tire
repaired or replaced and put it back
on your vehicle as soon as you can.
Thecompactsparetirehasashorter
tread life than a regular tire. Replace
it when you can see the tread wear
indicator bars. The replacement
should be the same size and design
tire, mounted on the same wheel.
Thecompactsparetireisnot
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the compact wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road sur-
faces than the regular tire. Use
greater caution while driving on
this tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
under any circumstances.
Follow these precautions whenever
you are using the compact spare tire:
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare.
Do not use the compact spare tire
if you are towing a trailer.
The wheel of the compact spare
tire is designed especially to fit
your vehicle. Do not use your
sparetireonanothervehicle
unlessitisthesamemakeand
model.
Turn off the Traction Control
System (see page ). Driving
withthecompactsparetiremay
activate the TCS.
269
Compact Spare Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
352
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder
of a busy road is dangerous. Drive
slowly along the shoulder until you
gettoanexitoranareatostopthat
is far away from the traffic lanes.
Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground away from
traffic. Put the transmission in
Park. Apply the parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
the trailer.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0). Have all the
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
2.1.
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
353
JACK VINYL BAG
SPARE TIRETOOLS
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the tailgate. Take the tools out of the storage
compartment.
The spare tire is stored under the
floor between the first and second
row of seats. If the front seats are
adjusted to the rear-most position,
move the seats forward slightly
and adjust the seat-backs to an
upright position (see page ).
Lift up the center table (see page
).
Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack.
Remove the cargo net.
Thetoolsandjackarebehinda
cover in the cargo area on the
driver’s side. Remove the cover by
turning the handle
counterclockwise, then pulling out
the cover.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
130
110
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
354
COVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Open either of the rear sliding
doors. Pull the floor carpet up by
lifting up on the edge, then raise
the floor lid by pulling up on the
handle. To keep the floor carpet
and lid out of the way, pull out the
hook on the back of the floor lid
and attach it into the seat-back
handle on the driver’s seat.
Remove the spare tire basket.
Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well. After
you have removed the spare tire,
screw this wing bolt back into
place.
Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2
turn with the wheel wrench.
If you are changing a rear tire,
close the sliding door. Then turn
off the sliding door MAIN switch.
8. 9.
11.
12.
10.
On EX and EX-L models On EX and EX-L models
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
355
HOOK
HANDLE
SPARE TIRE
BASKET
SPARE TIRE
WING BOLT
WHEEL NUTS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
△
Use the extension and wheel
wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Temporarily
place the flat tire on the ground
with the outside surface of the
wheel facing up. You could scratch
the wheel if you put it face down.
Locate the jacking point nearest
thetireyouneedtochange.Itis
pointed to by a mark molded
into the underside of the body.
Place the jack under the jacking
point. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
13. 14. 15.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
356
JACKING POINT
EXTENSION
WHEEL
WRENCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully,itmaybehotfrom
driving.
Do not attempt to forcibly pry the
wheel cover off with a screwdriver or
other tool. The wheel cover cannot
be removed without first removing
the wheel nuts.
16. 17.
CONTINUED
On LX model
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
357
WHEEL
COVER
HUB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Lower the vehicle to the ground
and remove the jack.
Put the flat tire in the supplied
vinyl bag. This bag is stored in the
rear compartment on the driver’s
side panel in the third row. Knot
the top of the vinyl bag.
18.
19. 20.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
358
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
You will find a u-shaped slit on the
carpet behind the seat bottom of
the third seat. Pull up the carpet at
theslitandremovetheplastic
screw with a coin.
When the third seat is not folded,
the flat tire is secured behind the
third seat.
Remove the bracket and the wing
bolt from the spare tire lid by
unscrewing the bracket mounting
bolt.
Turn on the sliding door MAIN
switch so you can open the door.
21.
22.
Storing the flat tire behind the third
seat
On EX and EX-L models
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
359
BRACKET MOUNTING BOLT
WING BOLT
BRACKET
MOUNTING
BOLT
BRACKET
PLASTIC
SCREW
BRACKET
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Storing the Flat Tire on the Floor
When the third seat is folded, the
flat tire is secured to the floor on
topofthefoldedseat.Pullupthe
carpet on the attachment point and
remove the plastic screw as
described in the previous
procedure.
Remove the wing bolt from the
bracket that is attached to the
spare tire lid.
Install the flat tire on the bracket
with the inside of the wheel facing
toward you. Put the tire mounting
wing bolt in the attachment point
through one of the five wheel nut
holes and the bracket as shown.
Poke holes in the vinyl bag. Secure
the flat tire by tightening the wing
bolt.
Adjust the seat-back of the third
seat to the upright position (see
page ). Install the bracket and
the bracket mounting bolt to the
attachment point as shown, and
tighten the bolt. Make sure the
bracket is securely locked.
23.
111
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
360
BRACKET
TIRE MOUNTING WING BOLT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Unclip the hook from the seat
back handle on the driver’s seat
and lower the floor lid and the
carpet.
Make sure to adjust the front
seats properly before you start
driving (see page ).
Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket clockwise to
lock it in place. Store the tools.
Replace the cover.
Close the tailgate.
Store the plastic screw in the spare
tire well.
Store the wheel cover in the spare
tire well. Make sure it will not get
scratched or damaged.
Storethesparetirebasketinthe
spare tire well.
Place the flat tire face down on the
attachment point. Put the tire
mountingwingboltinthe
attachment point through one of
the five wheel nut holes as shown.
Poke holes in the vinyl bag. Secure
the flat tire by tightening the wing
bolt.
24.
25.
26.
27.
110
On LX model
On EX and EX-L models
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
361
TIRE MOUNTING WING BOLT
ATTACHMENT POINT
Loose items can fly around the
interiorinacrashandcould
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Diagnosing why your engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
key to START (III):
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Turn the ignition switch to START
(III). If the headlights do not dim,
check the condition of the fuses. If
the fuses are OK, there is proba-
bly something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. (See
on page .)
When you turn the ignition switch to
START (III), you do not hear the
normal noise of the engine trying to
start. You may hear a clicking sound
or series of clicks, or nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
orNeutralorthestarterwillnot
operate.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Turn on the headlights and check
their brightness. If the headlights
are very dim or don’t light at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
380
364
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Emergency Towing
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
Jump Starting
362
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is dis-
charged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of the
battery and terminal connections
(see page ). You can then try
jump starting the vehicle from a
booster battery (see page ).
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to START (III), but
the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
Your vehicle has the Immobilizer
System. You should use a
properly-coded master or valet key
to start the engine (see page ).
A key that is not properly coded
will cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the dash panel to blink
rapidly.
Do you have fuel? Turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) for a
minute and watch the fuel gauge.
The low fuel level warning light
may not be working, so you were
not reminded to fill the tank.
317
364
259
374
380
90
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
Emergency
Towing
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Taking Care of the Unexpected
363
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
＋
If your vehicle’s battery has run
down,youmaybeabletostartthe
engine by using a booster battery.
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
You cannot start a Honda by pushing
or pulling it.
To jump start your vehicle, follow
these directions closely:
Open the hood and check the
physical condition of the battery
(see page ). In very cold
weather, check the condition of
the electrolyte. If it seems slushy
or like ice, do not try jump starting
until it thaws.
Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, climate
control, stereo system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
Honda’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive ( )
terminal on the booster battery.
1.
2.
3.
317
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Jump Starting
364
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can freeze.
Attempting to jump start with a frozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then the booster battery.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until all are
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
Start your vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
the jumper cable connections to
make sure they have good metal-
to-metal contact.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
The numbers in the illustration
show you the order to connect the
jumper cables.
4.
6.
7.
5.
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
365
BOOSTER
BATTERY
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle can overheat for several
reasons, such as lack of coolant or a
mechanical problem. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
In either case, you should take
immediate action.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park and set the parking brake.
Turn off the heating and cooling/
climate control system and all
otheraccessories.Turnonthe
hazard warning indicators.
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine.
The pointer of your vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange under most conditions.
Itmaygohigherifyouaredrivingup
a long steep hill on a very hot day. If
it climbs to the red mark, you should
determine the reason.
1.
2.
If Your Engine Overheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
366
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to your engine.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading
(climbing a long, steep hill on a
hot day with the A/C running, for
example), the engine should start
to cool down almost immediately.
If it does, wait until the tempera-
ture gauge comes down to the mid-
point then continue driving.
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Wait until you see no more signs
of steam or spray, then open the
hood.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
). If the level is below the
MIN mark, add coolant to halfway
between the MIN and MAX marks.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may also have to
add coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
3.
7.
6.
5.
4.
380
249
8.
CONTINUED
Emergency
Towing
If Your Engine Overheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
367
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. This
releases any remaining pressure in
the cooling system. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap and turn it until it comes
off.
Start the engine and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum (climate control to
FULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Add
coolant to the radiator up to the
base of the filler neck. If you do
not have the proper coolant
mixture available, you can add
plain water. Remember to have
the cooling system drained and
refilled with the proper mixture as
soon as you can.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair. (See
on page .)
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
9.
10.
11.
12.
380
If Your Engine Overheats
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Emergency
Towing
368
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. It should
never come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing, it
indicates that the oil pressure
dropped very low for a moment, then
recovered. If the indicator stays on
with the engine running, it shows
that the engine has lost oil pressure
and serious engine damage is
possible. In either case, you should
take immediate action.
Safely pull off the road and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood and check the oil
level (see page ). Although oil
levelandoilpressurearenot
directly connected, an engine that
is very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
Start the engine and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If the light
does not go out within ten seconds,
turn off the engine. There is a
mechanical problem that needs to
be repaired before you can
continue driving. (See
on page .)
1.
2.
3.
4.
248
297
380
Emergency
Towing
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
369
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn off
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the vehicle stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator should come on when
the ignition switch is ON (II), and go
out after the engine starts. If it
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, it indicates that the
charging system has stopped
charging the battery.
By eliminating as much of the
electrical load as possible, you can
drive several miles (kilometers)
before the battery is too discharged
to keep the engine running. Drive to
a service station or garage where
you can get technical assistance.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories:radio,heater,A/C,
climate control, rear defogger, cruise
control, etc. Try not to use other
electrically-operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running and take extra care not to
stall it. Starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Charging System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
370
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the indicator remains on past three
driving trips, or the fuel cap was not
loose or missing, have the vehicle
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible. Drive moderately until the
dealer has inspected the problem.
Avoid full-throttle acceleration and
driving at high speed.
Youshouldalsohavethedealer
inspect your vehicle if this indicator
comes on repeatedly, even though it
may turn off as you continue driving.
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. If it comes on
at any other time, it indicates one of
the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
your vehicle to put out excessive
emissions. Continued operation may
cause serious damage.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the cause of this indicator
coming on could be a loose or
missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap
and tighten it until it clicks several
times. Replace the fuel fill cap if it is
missing. Tightening the cap will not
make the indicator turn off
immediately; it takes at least three
driving trips. This indicator may also come on
along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
CONTINUED
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
371
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
If you keep driving with the
malfunction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and engine. Those repairs may
not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If your vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It takes several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
If possible, do not take your vehicle
for a state emissions test until the
readiness codes are set. Refer to
State Emissions Testing for more
information. (See page .)
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition ON (II), but do not start the
engine. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp will come on for 20 seconds. If
it then goes off, the readiness codes
are set. If it blinks 5 times, the
readiness codes are not set.
395
Readiness Codes
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
372
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. Because of the
brake system’s dual-circuit design, a
problem in one part of the system
will still give you braking at two
wheels. You will feel the brake pedal
go down much farther before the
vehicle begins to slow down, and you
will have to press harder on the
pedal. The distance needed to stop
will be much longer.
If it comes on at any other time, it
indicates a problem with the vehicle’s
brake system. In most cases, the
problem is a low fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir. Press lightly on
the brake pedal to see if it feels
normal. If it does, check the brake
fluid level the next time you stop at a
service station (see page ). If the
fluid level is low, take the vehicle to
your dealer and have the brake
system inspected for leaks or worn
brake pads.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the
longer distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible. (See
on page .)
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and cautiously.
The Brake System Indicator
normallycomesonwhenyouturn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to check the parking brake.
It comes on and stays lit if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
If the ABS indicator and the TCS
indicator come on with this indicator,
have the vehicle inspected by your
dealer immediately.
309
380
Emergency
Towing
Brake System Indicator
Taking Care of the Unexpected
373
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
U.S. indicator shown
Main Menu
Table of Contents
All the electrical circuits in your
vehicle have fuses to protect them
from a short circuit or overload.
These fuses are located in four fuse
boxes.
Theinteriorfuseboxesarelocated
underneath the dashboard on each
side.
Toopenthefuseboxonthe
passenger’s side, pull the right edge
of the cover.
The primary under-hood fuse box is
locatedinthebackoftheengine
compartment on the passenger’s side.
To open it, push the tabs as shown.
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
374
DRIVER’S SIDE INTERIOR
PASSENGER’S SIDE
INTERIOR
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The secondary fuse box is in the
engine compartment next to the
battery.
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
youshouldcheckforisablownfuse.
Determine from the chart on page
to , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid (the diagram for the
driver’s side interior fuse box is on
the kick panel below the fuse box),
which fuse or fuses control that
component. Check those fuses first,
but check all the fuses before
deciding that a blown fuse is not the
cause. Replace any blown fuses and
check the component’s operation.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0). Make sure the headlights and
all other accessories are off.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
Check each of the large fuses in
the primary under-hood fuse box
by looking through the top at the
wire inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head screw-
driver.
1.
2.
379377
3.
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Checking and Replacing Fuses
375
FUSE
BLOWN
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
pulling out each fuse with the fuse
puller provided in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
Look for a burned wire inside the
fuse. If it is burned, replace it with
oneofthesparefusesofthesame
rating or lower.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
5.4.
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
376
FUSE PULLER
BLOWN
Replacing a fuse with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a replace-
ment fuse with the proper rating for the
circuit, install one with a lower rating.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＊
＊
CONTINUED
Amps.No. Circuits Protected
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your vehicle.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified mechanic.
If the driver’s power window fuse is
removed, the AUTO feature of the
driver’s window will be disabled. You
should reset the AUTO feature (see
page ).
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradioyou
will see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency
display. Use the Preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page
).
6.
126
200
20 A
30 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
15 A
20 A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Right Headlight
ACG S
Hazard
Not Used
Stop
Left Headlight
ABS F/S
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
40 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
30 A
7.5 A
10 A
15 A
120 A
30 A
7.5 A
50 A
30 A
Power Window Motor
Power Sliding Door
Rear Defroster
Back Up, ACC
Power Seat
Heater Motor
Cooling Fan
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Battery
Condenser Fan
MG Clutch
Ignition Switch (IG 1 Main)
ABS Motor
: EX and EX-L models
On EX and EX-L models
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
377
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1
27
8
9
10
11
20 A
20 A
30 A
40 A
20 A
Rear Entertaiment system
Not Used
Seat Heaters
Driver’s Power Window
Rear A/C
Power Sliding Door
1:
2:
EX-L model
EX and EX-L model
1
1
2
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
378
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
On Canadian models
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
30 A
7.5 A
Fuel Pump
SRS
Heater Control, A/C Clutch
Relay, Cooling Fan Relay
Power Mirror
Daytime Running Light
ECU(PCM),CruiseControl
IG Coil
ACC Relay
Back-up Lights, Instrument
Lights
Turn Signals
Rear Wiper
Front Wiper
Starter Signal
Driver’s Side Automatic
Sliding Door
Power Seat Reclining
BSC
Power Seat Sliding
Passenger’s Side Automatic
Sliding Door
Daytime Running Light
Left Rear Window
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
ACC Socket
Inst. Panel Light, License
Light
Interior Light, Radio
Power Door Locks
Clock, Back Up
ABS Motor Check
Driver’s Power Window
Right Rear Window
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20 A
20 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A
1:
2:
EX and EX-L models
Canadian models
No. Amps. Circuits Protected Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.
1
1
1
2
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
379
Driver’s Side
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Passenger’s Side
Front
Front
:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or,
ifyoubelongtoone,anorganization
that provides roadside assistance.
Never tow your vehicle behind
another vehicle with just a rope or
chain. It is very dangerous.
The tow
truck uses metal cables with hooks
on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension and
the cables lift that end of the vehicle
off the ground. Your vehicle’s sus-
pension and body can be seriously
damaged.
If your Honda cannot be transported
by flat-bed, it should be towed by
wheel-lift equipment with the front
wheels off the ground. If, due to
damage, your vehicle must be towed
with the front wheels on the ground,
do the following.
With the front wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speedbelow35mph(55km/h).
There are three popular types of
professional towing equipment.
The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck.
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front or rear) and lift
them off the ground. The other two
tires remain on the ground.
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
ShifttoD,thentoN.
Turn off the engine.
Sling-type Equipment
Flat-bed Equipment
Wheel-lift Equipment
This method of towing
is unacceptable.
This is the best way to trans-
port your Honda.
This is
an acceptable way to tow your
Honda.
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
380
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shift the transmission or start the
engine, your vehicle must be trans-
ported with the front wheels off the
ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you decide to tow your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground,
make sure you use a properly-
designed and attached tow bar.
Prepare the vehicle for towing as
described above, and leave the
ignition switch in Accessory (I) so
the steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio and any items
plugged into the accessory power
socket are turned off so they do not
rundownthebattery.
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
381
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in Accessory (I), and
make sure the steering wheel turns
freely before you begin towing.
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
382
Main Menu
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your Honda, and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 384
................................Specifications . 386
DOT Tire Quality Grading
.......................(U.S Vehicles) . 388
Uniform Tire Quality
..................................Grading . 388
.................................Treadwear . 388
......................................Traction . 388
.............................Temperature . 389
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 390
......Driving in Foreign Countries . 391
.......................Emissions Controls . 392
.....................The Clean Air Act . 392
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 392
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 392
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 392
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 393
....................PGM-FI System . 393
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 393
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
...................(EGR) System . 393
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 393
....................Replacement Parts . 393
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 394
..............State Emissions Testing . 395
Technical Information
Technical Information
383
Main Menu
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
The Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Honda dealer uses to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes. It is
also necessary for licensing and
insuring your vehicle. The easiest
placetofindtheVINisonaplate
fastened to the top of the dashboard.
Youcanseeitbylookingthrough
the windshield on the driver’s side. It
is also on the Certification label at-
tached to the driver’s doorjamb, and
is stamped on the engine com-
partment bulkhead. The VIN is also
provided in bar code on the
Certification label.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
384
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
CERTIFICATION LABEL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Transmission Number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
The Engine Number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
385
ENGINE NUMBER
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
Technical Information
386
Dimensions
Weights
Air Conditioning
Capacities
201.2 in (5,110 mm)
75.6 in (1,920 mm)
5.3 US qt (5.0 , 4.4 Imp qt)
2.6 US qt (2.5 , 2.2 Imp qt)
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6
, 0.13 Imp gal)
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
4.6 US qt (4.4
, 3.9 Imp qt)
4.2 US qt (4.0 , 3.5 Imp qt)
2.48 US gal (9.4 , 2.07 Imp gal)
3.5 US qt (3.3 , 2.9 Imp qt)
8.3 US qt (7.9
, 7.0 Imp qt)
4.8 US qt (4.5 , 4.0 Imp qt)
HFC-134a (R-134a)
66.1 in (1,680 mm)
66.1 in (1,680 mm)
118.1 in (3,000 mm)
68.5 in (1,740 mm)
32 34 oz (850 900 g)
ND-OIL8
20.00 US gal (75.7
, 16.65 Imp gal)
1.98 US gal (7.5 , 1.65 Imp gal)
69.7 in (1,770 mm)
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross combined weight
rating (GCWR)
See the tire information label atta-
ched to the driver’s doorjamb.
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
8,265 lbs (3,750 kg)
Approx.
Front
Rear
1:
2:
Change
Total
Change
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Change
Total
U.S. Vehicles
Canada Vehicles
1:LX
2:EX,EX-L
1
2
1
2
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Specifications
Technical Information
387
Lights
Battery
Fuses
Engine
Alignment
Tires
12 V 21 W
12 V 21/5 W
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
212 cu-in (3,471 cm )
10 : 1
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0°
0°30’
2°07’
225/60R16 98T
T135/80D16 101M
36 psi (250 kPa , 2.5 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
24/2.2 CP
12 V 1.8 W
12 V 8 W
12 V 21 W
12 V 3 CP
2CP
21 CP (18 W)
4CP
10 W
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
60/55 W (HB2)12 V
65 AH/20 HR
52 AH/5 HR12 V
12 V
Headlights
Front turn signal/parking/side
marker lights
Rear turn signal lights
Stop/Taillights/Rear side
marker lights
Taillights
Back-up lights
License plate light
High-mount brake light
Individual map lights
Cargo area light
Vanity mirror lights
Capacity
Interior
Under-hood
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
Size
Pressure
See page 379 or the fuse label
attached to the dashboard.
See page 379 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door under the dashboard.
See spark plug maintenance sec-
tion page 316 .
See pages 377 and 378 or the fuse
box cover.
High/Low
Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Front
Rear
Driver’s side
Passenger’s side
(Amber)
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC VTEC,
6-cylinder, gasoline engine
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according
to Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Technical Information
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
388
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not over-
loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Technical Information
Temperature A,B,C
389
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Some conventional gasolines are
being blended with alcohol or an
ether compound. These gasolines
are collectively referred to as
oxygenated fuels. To meet clean air
standards, some areas of the United
States and Canada use oxygenated
fuels to help reduce emissions.
If you use an oxygenated fuel, be
sure it is unleaded and meets the
minimum octane rating requirement.
Before using an oxygenated fuel, try
to confirm the fuel’s contents. Some
states/provinces require this
informationtobepostedonthe
pump.
The following are the U.S. EPA and
Canadian CGSB approved
percentages of oxygenates:
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 15 percent MTBE by volume.
(ethyl or grain alcohol)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 10 percent ethanol by volume.
Gasoline containing ethanol may be
marketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’
(methyl or wood
alcohol)
Your vehicle was not designed to use
fuel that contains methanol.
Methanol can corrode metal parts in
the fuel system, and also damage
plastic and rubber components. This
damage would not be covered by
your warranties.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Fuel system damage or performance
problems resulting from the use of
an oxygenated fuel containing more
than the percentages of oxygenates
given above are not covered under
warranty.MTBE
ETHANOL
METHANOL
Technical Information
Oxygenated Fuels
390
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you are planning to take your
Honda outside the U.S. or Canada,
contact the tourist bureaus in the
areas you will be traveling in to find
out about the availability of unleaded
gasoline with the proper octane
rating.
If unleaded gasoline is not available,
be aware that using leaded gasoline
in your Honda will affect perfor-
mance and fuel mileage, and damage
its emissions controls. It will no
longer comply with U.S. and
Canadian emissions regulations, and
will be illegal to operate in North
America. To bring your vehicle back
into compliance will require the re-
placement of several components,
such as the oxygen sensors and the
three way catalytic converter. These
replacements are not covered under
warranty.
Technical Information
Driving in Foreign Countries
391
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a Positive
Crankcase Ventilation System. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The Positive Crank-
case Ventilation valve routes them
from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
The Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
288
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Technical Information
Emissions Controls
392
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
Ignition Timing Control, Exhaust
Gas Recirculation and Three Way
Catalytic Converter. These four
systems work together to control the
engine’s combustion and minimize
the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.The PGM-FI System uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: Air Intake,
Engine Control, and Fuel Control.
The Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) uses various sensors to
determine how much air is going
into the engine. It then controls how
much fuel to inject under all operat-
ing conditions.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO and NOx produced.
The Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) system takes some of the
exhaust gas and routes it back into
the intake manifold. Adding exhaust
gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces
the amount of NOx produced when
the fuel is burned.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
qualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your vehicle.
2
2
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System
Ignition Timing Control System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
Emissions Controls
393
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Keep the engine tuned-up.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any com-
bustible materials that come near it.
Parkyourvehicleawayfromhigh
grass, dry leaves, or other flamma-
bles.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
394
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle re-tested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for re-testing
by doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 20° and
95°F.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic transmission). Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (approximately 3 minutes).
Technical Information
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
395
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your Honda dealer.
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D (A/T). Do not use the cruise
control. When traffic allows, drive
for 90 seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
State Emissions Testing
Technical Information
396
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Customer Relations
................................Information . 398
....................Warranty Coverages . 399
Reporting Safety Defects
..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 400
.....................Authorized Manuals . 401
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
397
Main Menu
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
Service Manager or General
Manager can help. Almost all
problems are solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Relations Office.
U.S. Owners:
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
Canadian Owners:
384
Customer Relations Information
Warranty and Customer Relations
398
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 250-4318
American Honda Motor Co.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
coveredfortheusefullifeofthe
vehicle.
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from a Honda dealer.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Your new Honda is covered by these
warranties:
covers all genuine
Honda replacement parts against
defects in materials and workman-
ship.
genuine Honda Accessories are
covered under this warranty. Time
and mileage limits depend on the
type of accessory and other factors.
Please read your warranty manual
for details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s emis-
sions control systems. Time, mileage,
and coverage are conditional. Please
read the warranty manual for exact
information.
this warranty gives up
to 100 percent credit toward a
replacement battery.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2003 Honda Warranty Information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your Honda’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2003 Warranty
Manual that came with your vehicle.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
Warranty Coverages
Warranty and Customer Relations
399
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To contact NHTSA, you may either
call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
Washington D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
Warranty and Customer Relations
400
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
２
０
０
３
Ｈ
Ｏ
Ｎ
The following publications covering the operation and
servicing of your vehicle can be obtained from Helm
Incorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,
for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone number
on the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,
contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,
Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.
Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should
contact their authorized Honda dealer.
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
401
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Price
Each
$70.00
$50.00
$44.00
$34.00
$29.00
$10.00
FREE
Form Description
1999-2003 Honda Odyssey
Service Manual
1999-2003 Honda Odyssey
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
1999-2003 Honda Odyssey
Body Repair Manual
2002 Honda Odyssey
Owner’s Manual
2003 Honda Odyssey
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
2003 Honda Odyssey
Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
Publication
Form Number
61S0X04
61S0X04EL
61S0X30
31S0X640
31S0X740
31S0XQ00
HON-R
PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Name Year
Qty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.00
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Ｓ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｐ
Ｔ
Ｏ
Ｐ
Ａ
Ｙ
Ｍ
Ｅ
Ｎ
Ｔ
This manual complements the Service Manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
402
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name
Attention
Apartment Number
State & Zip Code
City
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
Street Address No P.O. Box Number
()
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 72, 370
............................Jump Starting . 364
..............................Maintenance . 317
............................Specifications . 387
..............................Before Driving . 243
....................................Belts,Seat .8,50
.........................Beverage Holders . 132
.................................Body Repairs . 350
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 267
.............Break-in, New Linings . 244
....................Bulb Replacement . 334
...........................................Fluid . 309
.......................................Parking . 129
.................System Indicator . 72, 373
........................Wear Indicators . 266
.............................Braking System . 266
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 244
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 83
........................Brights, Headlights . 82
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 335
..............................Brake Lights . 334
......................Cargo Area Light . 338
................Front Parking Lights . 333
........Front Side Marker Lights . 333
.................................Headlights . 332
.........High-mount Brake Light . 336
..............Individual Map Lights . 338
...................License Plate Light . 337
...Accessories and Modifications . 251
................................Accessories . 251
.Additional Safety Precautions . 252
............................Modifications . 252
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 92
............Accessory Power Sockets . 138
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 299
........Advanced Airbag System . 10, 54
.............................Airbag (SRS) . 10, 54
.....................Air Cleaner Element . 311
......Air Conditioning System . 144, 152
..............................Maintenance . 321
.....................Rear A/C Control . 166
.........................Usage . 147, 154, 160
...............Air Outlets (Vents) . 146, 152
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 323
.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 390
.......Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . 345
......................................Antifreeze . 301
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 74, 268
...................................Operation . 267
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 200
.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 91
..........................Appearance Care . 343
........................................Armrests . 115
...............Audio Controls, Remote . 199
................Audio System . 169, 181, 201
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 52
...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 83
.............Automatic Speed Control . 235
..............Automatic Transmission . 260
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 386
...............Checking Fluid Level . 307
.......................................Shifting . 261
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 260
................Shift Lever Positions . 261
....................Shift Lock Release . 263
Index
A
B
I
Main Menu
＊
Bulb Replacement
.........................Rear Bulbs . 334, 335
............................Specifications . 387
....................Turn Signal Lights . 333
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 332
................DANGER, Explanation of . ii
...................................Dashboard . 2, 70
................Daytime Running Lights . 83
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 400
................Defogger, Rear Window . 87
................................Cancel Button . 237
............................Capacities Chart . 386
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 66
..........................Cargo Area Light . 141
.................................Cargo Hooks . 256
......................................Cargo Net . 256
.............................Carrying Cargo . 253
Cassette Player
............................................Care . 198
...................Operation . 174, 195, 209
..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii
..................CD Changer . 177, 191, 214
......................CD Player . 177, 189, 212
...............................Center Pocket . 136
..................................Center Table . 130
........................Certification Label . 384
............................................Chains . 329
Changing Oil
........................................How to . 299
......................................When to . 288
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 353
............Changing Engine Coolant . 303
...Charging System Indicator . 72, 370
............Checklist, Before Driving . 258
..................Childproof Door Locks . 98
.....................................Child Safety . 24
.......................................Child Seats . 30
......LATCH Anchorage System . 48
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46
....................Cleaner Element, Air . 311
Cleaning
....................Aluminum Wheels . 345
...................................Carpeting . 346
......................................Exterior . 344
.........................................Fabric . 347
.......................................Interior . 346
.......................................Leather . 347
...................................Seat Belts . 347
...........................................Vinyl . 347
....................................Windows . 348
...............Climate Control System . 152
.........................Clock, Setting the . 130
......................................Coat Hook . 137
.....................Code, Audio System . 200
........................CO in the Exhaust . 392
...................................Coin Holder . 136
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 259
..............................Compact Spare . 352
...............Consumer Information . 398
.............Controls, Instruments and . 69
Coolant
........................................Adding . 301
....................................Checking . 249
.........................Proper Solution . 301
...................................Replacing . 303
...................Temperature Gauge . 79
....................Corrosion Protection . 349
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 392
............Cruise Control Operation . 235
..........Customer Relations Office . 398
Index
C
D
II
Main Menu
CONTINUED
Defrosting
.............the Windows . 149, 159, 164
....................................Dimensions . 386
...............Dimming the Headlights . 82
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 307
..................................Engine Oil . 248
..........................Directional Signals . 84
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 266
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 300
Doors
..............Locking and Unlocking . 92
....................Lockout Prevention . 93
..............Manual Sliding Doors . 101
..............................Monitor Light . 75
......................Power Door Locks . 92
.................Power Sliding Doors . 103
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 388
.....................................Drive Belts . 322
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 257
....................................Economy . 250
.........................In Bad Weather . 272
................In Foreign Countries . 391
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 322
...................................DVD Player . 217
............................Fabric, Cleaning . 347
..................Fan, Interior . 144, 157, 162
Features, Comfort and
..............................Convenience . 143
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 245
Filters
................................Air Cleaner . 311
.........................Dust and Pollen . 322
...............................................Oil . 299
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 87
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 353
..............................Economy, Fuel . 250
............Emergencies on the Road . 351
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 364
...........Brake System Indicator . 373
................Changing a Flat Tire . 353
.....Charging System Indicator . 370
..................Checking the Fuses . 374
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 369
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 371
..................Overheated Engine . 366
.........................Emergency Brake . 129
......................Emergency Flashers . 87
......................Emergency Towing . 380
.......................Emissions Controls . 392
.............Emissions Testing, State . 395
Engine
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 79
.................................Drive Belts . 322
..............Engine Speed Limiter . 263
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 72, 371
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 72, 369
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 297
...............................Overheating . 366
............................Specifications . 387
.......................................Starting . 259
......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 390
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 392
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 66
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
........................................System . 393
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 22
..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 344
Index
E
F
III
Main Menu
.....................................Floor Mats . 346
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 307
..........................................Brake . 309
..........................Power Steering . 310
................Windshield Washers . 306
FM Stereo Radio
...................Reception . 170, 182, 203
.................Folding the Third Seat . 120
.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 391
..........................Four-way Flashers . 87
............................Front Airbags . 10, 54
.................................................Fuel . 244
......................Fill Door and Cap . 245
...........................................Gauge . 79
................Octane Requirement . 244
...............................Oxygenated . 391
........................Reserve Indicator . 77
........................Tank, Filling the . 345
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 375
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 250
..........................................Gasohol . 390
.........................................Gasoline . 244
...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 77
...........................................Gauge . 79
................Octane Requirement . 244
........................Tank, Filling the . 245
................Gas Station Procedures . 245
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 79
...............................................Fuel . 79
...............................Speedometer . 78
.................................Tachometer . 78
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 276
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
.......................................Rating) . 276
..............................Glass Cleaning . 348
......................................Glove Box . 100
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 276
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 384
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 89
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 332
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 87
........................................Headlights . 82
........................................Aiming . 332
..............Automatic Lighting Off . 83
............Daytime Running Lights . 83
..................High Beam Indicator . 76
.........................Reminder Chime . 82
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 332
...................................Turning on . 82
...................................Headphones . 231
............................Head Restraints . 115
...............................Heated Mirror . 129
.....................Heating and Cooling . 144
.............High Altitude, Starting at . 259
.................High-Low Beam Switch . 82
HomeLink Universal
................................Transceiver . 238
....................................Hood Latch . 313
.......................Hood, Opening the . 246
..............................................Horn .3,81
.................................Hydroplaning . 273
Index
G
H
I
IV
Main Menu
CONTINUED
.......................Label, Certification . 384
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 84
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 17, 50
.............LATCH Anchorge System . 48
....................Light Control Switch . 139
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 332
.......................................Indicator . 71
.......................................Interior . 139
.........................................Parking . 82
..................................Turn Signal . 84
............................Load Limits . 254, 274
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 91
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 91
............................Fuel Fill Door . 245
..................................Glove Box . 100
....................Lockout Prevention . 93
.................................Power Door . 92
.....................Sliding Doors . 101, 103
........................................Tailgate . 98
........................Low Coolant Level . 249
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 77
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 72, 369
................................Lower Anchors . 48
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 386
.........................................Luggage . 253
..................................Maintenance . 283
...Owner Maintenance Checks . 295
.................................Record . 293-294
......................Required Indicator . 80
..........................................Safety . 284
.............................Schedule . 286-292
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 64, 371
...................Manual Sliding Doors . 101
...............................Meters, Gauges . 78
...................Methanol in Gasoline . 390
........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 128
Moving the Second Row Bucket
.............................................Seat . 117.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 356
.......................................Jack, Tire . 354
................................Jump Starting . 364
..................................................Keys . 89
...........................................Switch . 91
............Timing Control System . 393
........................Immobilizer System . 90
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 71
..................Individual Map Lights . 141
...............................Infant Restraint . 34
......................................Infant Seats . 30
......LATCH Anchorage System . 48
...........................Lower Anchors . 48
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 323
.................................Inside Mirror . 128
.............................Inspection, Tire . 325
........................Instrument Panel . 2, 70
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 83
...........................Interior Cleaning . 346
...............................Interior Lights . 139
........................................Introduction . i
Index
J
K
L
M
V
Main Menu
...................Neutral Gear Position . 262
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 244
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 384
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 244
.........................................Odometer . 78
...............................Odometer, Trip . 79
Oil
........................Change, How to . 299
......................Change, When to . 288
......................Checking Engine . 248
..............Pressure Indicator . 72, 369
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 298
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 92
Onboard Refueling Vapor
....................................Recovery . 392
..Operation in Foreign Countries . 391
............................Outside Mirrors . 128
....................Overheating, Engine . 366
.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 295
.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 390
...................Radiator Overheating . 366
.....Radio/CD Sound System . 181, 201
...........................Readiness Codes . 372
...............................Rear A/C Unit . 166
.......................Rear Compartment . 135
........Rear Entertainment System . 217
Rear Lights, Bulb
......................Replacement . 334, 335
..........................Rear View Mirror . 128
.................Rear Window Defogger . 87
...............................Rear Windows . 127
.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 86
.....Reclining the Seat Backs . 111, 114
.........Reclining the Second Seats . 111
..............Reclining the Third Seat . 111
.............................Reminder Lights . 71
..............................Paint Touch-up . 345
..............Panel Brightness Control . 83
........................Park Gear Position . 261
...........................................Parking . 265
...............................Parking Brake . 129
Parking Brake and Brake
.................System Indicator . 72, 373
.................................Parking Lights . 82
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 265
Passenger Airbag Cutoff
.......................................Indicator . 62
.............................PGM-FI System . 393
..................Polishing and Waxing . 345
Power Sliding Doors
...............................Indicator . 75, 108
...................................Operation . 103
.....................................Switches . 104
............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 22
............................Protecting Adults . 13
...Additional Safety Precautions . 22
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 22
........................Protecting Children . 24
.......................Protecting Infants . 34
.......Protecting Larger Children . 42
.........Protecting Small Children . 38
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 46
.............................Using LATCH . 48
Index
P
R
O
N
VI
Main Menu
＊
＊
CONTINUED
................Remote Audio Controls . 199
.............................Remote Control . 223
.......................Remote Transmitter . 94
Removing the Second
...........................................Seats . 119
Replacement Information
.................Air Cleaner Element . 311
..........................Engine Coolant . 303
................Engine Oil and Filter . 299
..........................................Fuses . 375
................................Light Bulbs . 332
....................................Schedule . 286
................................Spark Plugs . 313
................................Timing Belt . 323
...........................................Tires . 327
.............................Wiper Blades . 319
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 53
Reserve Tank,
.................Engine Coolant . 249, 301
..................Reverse Gear Position . 262
................................Rotation, Tire . 326
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 50
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 400
.................................Safety Features . 7
.........................................Airbags . 10
..................................Door Locks . 11
..........................Head Restraints . 11
.......................................Seat Belts . 8
.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 67
...............................Safety Messages . ii
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 50
...............Additional Information . 50
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 52
.....................................Cleaning . 347
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 50
................................Maintenance . 53
Reminder Light and
................................Beeper . 50, 73
................................Replacement . 53
...................System Components . 50
...............Use During Pregnancy . 22
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17
..................................Seat Heaters . 123
...............................................Seats . 109
..............................Adjustments . 110
..........Drivers Lumbar Support . 114
.............Folding the Third Seat . 120
........................Head Restraints . 115
.....Manual Height Adjustment . 112
....................Passenger Seating . 109
.......Reclining the Second Seat . 111
..........Reclining the Third Seat . 111
....Removing the Second Seats . 119
.....................Third Seat Access . 116
............................Security System . 234
Sensors
Front Passenger’s Weight
.....................................Sensors . 57
....Driver’s Seat Position Sensor . 56
...............................Serial Number . 384
...........................Service Intervals . 288
...........................Service Manual . 401
.........Service Station Procedures . 245
..........................Setting the Clock . 130
.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 260
........................Shift Lock Release . 263
..............................Side Airbags . 10, 59
..........................Cutoff Indicator . 60
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
..............................Replacement . 333
Index
S
VII
Main Menu
.....................................Tachometer . 78
............................................Tailgate . 98
.................................Opening the . 98
...................Open Monitor Light . 75
.Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 334, 335
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 351
...................Tape Player . 174, 195, 209
Technical Descriptions
.....Emissions Control Systems . 392
.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 390
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 394
.......................Temperature Gauge . 79
...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 52
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 46
............................Theft Protection . 200
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 394
..........................Time, Setting the . 130
....................................Timing Belt . 323
....................................Tire Chains . 329
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 353
...............................................Tires . 323
..............................Air Pressure . 323
...................................Balancing . 326
.........................Checking Wear . 325
..........................Compact Spare . 352
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 388
......................................Inflation . 323
..................................Inspection . 325
...................................Replacing . 327
......................................Rotating . 326
...........................................Snow . 329
............................Specifications . 387
................................Tire Chains . 329
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 353
...............................Signaling Turns . 84
.........................Sliding Doors . 101, 103
.....................................Snow Tires . 329
...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 344
................Sound System . 169, 181, 201
Spare Tire
......................................Inflating . 352
............................Specifications . 387
....................................Spark Plugs . 313
....................Specifications Charts . 386
................................Speed Control . 235
...................................Speedometer . 78
..........SRS, Additional Information . 54
...Additional Safety Precautions . 65
.............................Airbag Service . 64
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 59
.....How Your Airbags Work . 55, 59
........................SRS Components . 54
.............................SRS Indicator . 59, 73
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 92
.......................Starting the Engine . 259
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 259
................With a Dead Battery . 364
..............State Emissions Testing . 395
........Steam Coming from Engine . 366
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 88
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 91
...Stereo Sound System . 169, 181, 201
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 341
...................................Storage Box . 137
........................Sunglasses Holder . 134
........................................Sun Visor . 134
Supplemental Restraint System
......................................Servicing . 64
.........................SRS Indicator . 59, 73
...................System Components . 54
..................................Synthetic Oil . 298
Index
T
VIII
Main Menu
＊
＊
................................Vanity Mirror . 135
.........Vehicle Capacity Load . 254, 274
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 386
....Vehicle Identification Number . 384
.............................Vehicle Storage . 341
.............................Ventilation . 147, 152
.................................................VIN . 384
...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 347
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 298
.....................Underside, Cleaning . 349
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 351
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 388
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 244
.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 346
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 300
.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 67
..................Warranty Coverages . 399
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 306
............................Level Indicator . 77
.....................................Operation . 86
.........................................Washing . 344
..................Waxing and Polishing . 345
Wheels
...............Adjusting the Steering . 88
............Alignment and Balance . 326
..........................Compact Spare . 352
......................................Wrench . 356
Windows
.............................Auto Reverse . 126
.....................................Cleaning . 348
................Operating the Power . 124
............................................Rear . 127
...........................Rear, Defogger . 87
Windshield
.......................................Cleaning . 84
...................Defroster . 149, 159, 164
.......................................Washers . 86
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 319
.....................................Operation . 84
Rear Windshield Wiper and
.....................................Washer . 86
..................Wireless Headphones . 231
....................................Worn Tires . 325
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 380
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 274
................Emergency Wrecker . 380
Tranction Control
.............................System(TCS) . 269
Transmission
...............Checking Fluid Level . 307
...........................Fluid Selection . 308
..............Identification Number . 384
.............Shifting the Automatic . 261
.....................................Treadwear . 388
.......................................Trip Meter . 79
....................................Turn Signals . 84
: U.S. and Canada only
Index
U
V
W
IX
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):Power Steering Fluid:
Brake Fluid:Recommended Engine Oil:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
36 psi (250 kPa , 2.5 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 86 or higher.
Front/Rear:
Compact Spare Tire:
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.6 US qt (4.4
, 3.9 Imp qt)
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
aDEXRON
III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
297
307
310
309
20.00 US gal (75.7 , 16.65 Imp gal)
Main Menu
